3758407_RevB_600 2_S 10_WireDgrms_BlkforKB_28Aug06.qxp 650G 600 2 Sub Zero Built In Series Refrigerator Service Manual

User Manual: 650G

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 188 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

BBuuiilltt--iinn ((660000--

BBuuiilltt--iinn ((660000--22

22)) SSeerriieess

)) SSeerriieess

Approximate Starting Serial #2127000

TTeecchhnniiccaall

SSeerrvviiccee MMaannuuaall

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series General Information

1-1 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

SECTION 1

GENERAL INFORMATION

General Information Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

1-2

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE

If you should have any questions regarding the

600-2 Series and/or this manual, please contact:

Sub-Zero Freezer Company, Inc.

ATTN: Service Department

P.O. Box 44988

Madison, WI 53744 - 4988

Customer Service & Parts / Warranty Claims

Phone #: (800) 222 - 7820

Technical Assistance

Phone #: (800) 919 - 8324

Customer Service & Technical Assistance

Facsimile #: (608) 441 - 5887

Parts / Warranty Claims

Facsimile #: (608) 441 - 5886

Service Department E-Mail Address:

customerservice@subzero.com

Office Hours:

7:00 AM to 7:00 PM Central Time

Monday through Friday

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION

Below are Product Safety Labels used in this manual.

The "Signal Words" used are WARNING or CAUTION.

When reviewing this manual, please note these differ-

ent Product Safety Labels placed at the beginning of

certain sections of this manual. You must follow the

instructions given in the boxes of the Product Safety

Labels in order to avoid personal injury and/or product

damage.

The sample Product Safety Labels below illustrate the

precautions that should be taken when the signal word

is observed.

INTRODUCTION

This 600-2 Series Technical Service Manual has been compiled to provide the most recent service information for

600-2 Series units. This information will enable the service technician to troubleshoot and diagnose malfunctions,

perform necessary repairs, and return a unit to proper operational condition.

The service technician should read the complete instructions contained in this manual before initiating any repairs on

a 600-2 Series unit.

INDICATES THAT HAZARDOUS OR UNSAFE PRAC-

TICES COULD RESULT IN SEVERE PERSONAL

INJURY OR DEATH.

Indicates that hazardous or unsafe practices could

result in minor personal injury, and/or product dam-

age, and/or property damage.

In addition, please pay attention to the signal word

“NOTE”, which highlights information that is espe-

cially important for the topic being covered.

This manual is designed to be used by Authorized Service Personnel only. Sub-Zero Freezer Co., Inc.

assumes no responsibility for any repairs made on Sub-Zero refrigeration units by anyone other than

Authorized Service Technicians.

Information and images contained in this manual are the copyright property of Sub-Zero Freezer Company, Inc.

Neither this manual nor any information or images contained herein may be copied or used in whole or in part

without the express written consent of Sub-Zero Freezer Company, Inc.

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series General Information

1-3 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Section 1 - General Information 1-1

Introduction / Safety Information / Technical Assistance .. 1-2

Table of Contents .............................................................. 1-3

Warranty Information ........................................................ 1-5

Model Description ............................................................. 1-6

Section 2 - Installation Information 2-1

Installation Considerations ............................................... 2-2

Installation Warning ....................................................... 2-2

Anti-Tip Component Installation .................................... 2-2

Dual Unit Installation ..................................................... 2-3

Unit Leveling ................................................................. 2-3

Door Adjustment ........................................................... 2-4

Special Side-by Side Door Adjustment ......................... 2-5

Freezer Drawer Adjustment .......................................... 2-6

Vertical Adjustment / Pitch Adjustment ..................... 2-6

Door Panel Installation .................................................. 2-7

90° Door Stop Pin / 90° Door Stop Cam ...................... 2-8

Section 3 - Electronic Control System Information 3-1

Terminology & Component Descriptions .......................... 3-2

Basic Electronic Control System ...................................... 3-3

Control Board Layout & Summary Table ......................... 3-4

Control Panel Layout ....................................................... 3-5

Basic Electronic Control Input Operations ....................... 3-6

Unit ON/OFF ................................................................ 3-6

Adjusting Set-Point (Temp. Adjustment) ...................... 3-6

Icemaker System ON/OFF ........................................... 3-7

Door Ajar Alarm Feature ON/OFF ................................ 3-7

Accent Lighting System ON/OFF .................................. 3-7

Functions of Electronic Control System ........................... 3-8

Supply Power to Lighting System ................................. 3-8

Monitor, Regulate and Display Temps ........................... 3-9

Control Condenser Fan Operation ............................. 3-10

Minimize Condensation on Glass Door ....................... 3-11

Refrigerator Off-Cycle Defrost .................................... 3-12

“Adaptive Defrost” of Freezer Evaporator .................. 3-13

Monitor Compressors, Display if Service is Needed ... 3-14

Monitor Icemaker, Display if Service is Needed ......... 3-15

Unique Electronic Control Input Operations ................... 3-16

Temperature Units Selection Mode ............................ 3-16

Sabbath Mode ............................................................ 3-17

Showroom Mode ........................................................ 3-17

Manual Compartment Disable Mode ......................... 3-18

Manual Freezer Evaporator Defrost ........................... 3-18

Possible Error Indicators ............................................... 3-19

Troubleshooting Input Operations ................................. 3-20

Diagnostic Mode ......................................................... 3-20

Diagnostic Mode Indicators ...................................... 3-21

Error Code Table ...................................................... 3-21

Clearing Error Codes ................................................... 3-22

Manual Component Activation Mode .......................... 3-22

Temperature Log Recall Mode ................................... 3-23

Compartment Temperature History Only ................. 3-23

Compartment & Evaporator Temperature History .... 3-24

Temperature Log Event Indicators ........................... 3-25

Temperature Log Index Chart ................................. 3-26

Section 4 - Sealed System Information 4-1

HFC 134a Refrigerant Information ................................... 4-2

General 134a Rules ...................................................... 4-2

Sealed System Repair Procedures .............................. 4-3

Sealed System Operation ................................................ 4-4

Refrigerant Flow Diagrams ............................................... 4-6

Section 5 - Air Flow & Fan Blade Spacing 5-1

Model 601R-2 .................................................................... 5-2

Model 601RG-2 ................................................................. 5-2

Model 601F-2 .................................................................... 5-3

Models 611-2 & 650-2 ....................................................... 5-3

Models 611G-2 & 650G-2 ................................................. 5-4

Models 632-2 & 642-2 ....................................................... 5-4

Model 661-2 ...................................................................... 5-5

Model 685-2 (PTS #2271174) ........................................... 5-5

Model 695-2 (PTS #2269189) .......................................... 5-6

Mod 685-2 (SWS #2271174) & 695-2 (SWS #2269189) ... 5-6

Section 6 - Icemaker Information 6-1

Icemaker System Information............................................ 6-2

Icemaker Components....................................................... 6-2

Icemaker Operation............................................................ 6-3

Manually Stopping Icemaker.............................................. 6-8

Manually Starting Icemaker................................................ 6-9

Adjust Water Fill Level....................................................... 6-9

Section 7 - Component Access and Removal 7-1

WARNINGS and CAUTIONS ............................................ 7-2

Component Access and Removal Table of Contents ....... 7-2

Exterior Cosmetic / Mechanical (All Models) ................. 7-3

Refrig. Interior Cosmetic/Mechanical (All Models) ....... 7-15

Freezer Interior Cosmetic / Mechanical (601F-2) ........ 7-24

Freezer Interior Cosmetic / Mechanical

(611-2, 611G-2, 650-2, 650G-2) ............................... 7-30

Freezer Interior Cosmetic / Mechanical

(632-2, 642-2, 661-2) ............................................... 7-36

Freezer Interior Cosmetic / Mechanical

(685-2-PTS#2271174, 695-2-PTS#2269189) ......... 7-42

Freezer Interior Cosmetic / Mechanical

(685-2-SWS#2271174, 695-2-SWS#2269189) ....... 7-48

Lower Compressor Area Mechanical

(601R-2, 601RG-2, 601F-2) ..................................... 7-55

Upper Compressor Area Mechanical

(All Models Except 601’s) ....................................... 7-56

Sealed System (Models 601R-2, 601RG-2, 601F-2) .. 7-57

Sealed System (All Models Except 601’s) ................... 7-61

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page # Page #

General Information Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

1-4

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Page #

Section 8 - Troubleshooting Guides 8-1

Troubleshooting Guides .................................................... 8-2

How to Use Error Code Troubleshooting Guide ........... 8-2

Error Code Table ........................................................... 8-2

Error Code Troubleshooting Guide ................................... 8-3

How to Use General Troubleshooting Guide ............... 8-5

Thermistor Location Code Tables ............................. 8-5

General Troubleshooting Guide Table of Contents ......... 8-6

General Troubleshooting Guide ....................................... 8-6

Sealed System Diagnostic Tables ................................. 8-16

Normal Operating Pressures Table ............................ 8-16

Temperature / Pressure Table ................................... 8-17

Pressure Indications Table ......................................... 8-17

Control Panel Membrane Switch / Ribbon Cable Test .. 8-18

Section 9 - Technical Data Tables 9-1

Model 601R-2 ................................................................... 9-2

Model 601RG-2 ................................................................ 9-3

Model 601F-2 ................................................................... 9-4

Model 611-2 ...................................................................... 9-5

Model 611G-2 ................................................................... 9-6

Model 632-2 ..................................................................... 9-7

Model 642-2 ..................................................................... 9-8

Model 650-2 ..................................................................... 9-9

Model 650G-2 ................................................................. 9-10

Model 661-2 .................................................................... 9-11

Model 685-2 (PTS #2271174) ........................................ 9-12

Model 685-2 (SWS #2271174) ....................................... 9-13

Model 695-2 (PTS #2269189) ........................................ 9-14

Model 695-2 (SWS #2269189) ........................................ 9-15

Section 10 - Wiring Diagrams & Schematics 10-1

Model 601R-2 ................................................................. 10-2

Model 601RG-2 .............................................................. 10-4

Model 601F-2 ................................................................. 10-6

Model 611-2 / 650-2 ........................................................ 10-8

Model 611G-2 / 650G-2 ................................................. 10-10

Model 632-2 / 642-2 ...................................................... 10-12

Model 661-2 .................................................................. 10-14

Mod. 685-2 (PTS #2271174), 695-2 (PTS #2269189) .. 10-16

Mod. 685-2 (SWS #2271174), 695-2 (SWS #2269189). 10-18

Page #

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series General Information

1-5 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

WARRANTY INFORMATION

This page summarizes the 2, 5 & 12 Year Warranty pro-

vided with every 600-2 Series unit, as well as two spe-

cial warranties:

•Non-Residential Warranty - Applies to units installed

in non-residential applications.

•Display/Model Home Warranty - Applies to distribu-

tor or dealer display units, and units in model

homes, sold three years after date of manufacture.

Following the warranty summaries are details and notes

about the warranties.

TWO, FIVE & TWELVE YEAR Warranty

• 2 year TOTAL PRODUCT, *parts and labor.

NOTE: Stainless Steel (Classic, carBon & Platinum)

doors, panels & product frames are covered by a 60

day parts & labor warranty for cosmetic defects.

• 5 Year SEALED SYSTEM, **parts and labor.

• 6th - 12th year LIMITED SEALED SYSTEM, **parts

only.

ONE & FIVE YEAR Non-Residential Warranty

(Example: Office, Yacht, etc.)

• 1 Year TOTAL PRODUCT, *parts and labor.

NOTE: Stainless Steel (Classic, carBon & Platinum)

doors, panels & product frames are covered by a 60

day parts & labor warranty for cosmetic defects.

• 5 Year SEALED SYSTEM, **parts and labor.

ONE & FIVE YEAR Display/Model Home Warranty

(Display units sold three years after date of manu-

facture)

• 1 Year TOTAL PRODUCT, *parts and labor.

NOTE: Stainless Steel (Classic, carBon & Platinum)

doors, panels & product frames are covered by a 60

day parts & labor warranty for cosmetic defects.

• 5 Year SEALED SYSTEM, **parts and labor.

Figure 1-1. Serial Tag Layout (Layout Reference Only)

LISTED

CUS

Date Code

776N

LISTED HOUSEHOLD

REFRIGERATOR OR FREEZER

REFRIGERANT

SERIAL NUMBER

MADISON, WI

PRODUCT SERVICE 1-800-222-7820

MODEL

115Vac, 60Hz, 1 Phase

TOTAL AMPS

FREEZER CO., INC.

FREEZER ALSO VERIFIED IN

ACCORDANCE WITH

ENERGY STANDARD

CAN/CSA-C300-91

REFRIGERATOR

632/S 2 0000000

10.0 9.0 2.0 R134a

Jul 2003

Model Number Serial Number Manufacture Date

Refrigerant Charge Total Amps Refrigerant Type

Warranty Details:

* Includes, but is not limited to the following:

Electronic Control System Components, Fan & Light

Switches, Fan Motors & Blades, Defrost & Drain

Heaters, Defrost Terminator, Drain Pan, Drain Tubes,

Wiring, Light sockets & bulbs, Icemaker, Water Valve,

Door hinges, Door closers & Cams, Compressor

Electricals, etc. . .

* Stainless Steel (Classic, Platinum & Carbon) doors,

panels and product frames are covered by a limited 60

day parts and labor warranty for cosmetic defects.

** Includes the following:

Compressors, Condenser, Evaporators, Filter-Driers,

Heat-exchangers, All Tubing that Carries the Freon.

NOTE: Condenser Fan Motors, Freon, Solder and

compressor electricals are NOT considered sealed

system parts.

Warranty Notes:

• All warranties begin at unit's initial installation date.

• All Warranty and Service information collected by Sub-

Zero is arranged and stored under the unit serial num-

ber, and the customer's last name.

Sub-Zero requests that you have the model and serial

number available whenever contacting the factory or

parts distributor.

• The serial tag on SIDE-BY-SIDE models is located by

the top door hinge in the freezer compartment.

• The serial tag on OVER-AND-UNDER models is locat-

ed by the top door hinge in the refrigerator compart-

ment.

• The serial tag on ALL-REFRIGERATOR and ALL-

FREEZER models is located by the top door hinge in

the refrigeration compartment.

General Information Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

1-6

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

MODEL DESCRIPTIONS

These pages briefly describes the models covered in this 600-2 Series Technical Service Manual (Models 601R-2,

601RG-2, 601F-2, 611-2, 611G-2, 632-2, 642-2, 650-2, 650G-2, 661-2, 685-2, 695-2) The letter after the backward

slash in the alpha-numeric model number indicates the exterior variation (“/F” indicates a Framed look with the door

trim visible, “/O” indicates that it is intended for the door panels to Overlay the door trim, “/S” indicates the unit is

Classic Stainless Steel finish, ”/B” indicates the unit is carBon Stainless Steel finish, ”/P” indicates the unit is

Platinum Stainless Steel finish). The “-2” means this is the second design build for this series.

The following lists contain the model numbers of the 600-2 Series with a brief description of each model. A diagram

of the basic model configuration accompanies each list.

NOTE: Functional parts are common to each model configuration, meaning for example, models 601R/F-2, 601R/O-

2 and 601R/S-2 will utilize common functional parts. For this reason, the backward slash and letter after the model

numbers will only be used in this manual when necessary.

Model 601R-2

601R/F-2

601R/O-2

601R/S-2

601R/B-2

601R/P-2

MODEL DESCRIPTION

36” Wide, All-Refrigerator, Framed Door Trim with

Handle, Louver Grille

36” Wide, All-Refrigerator, Overlay Door Trim with-

out Handle, Louver Grille

36” Wide, All-Refrigerator, Classic Stainless Steel

Door and Grille

36” Wide, All-Refrigerator, CarBon Stainless Steel

Door and Grille

36” Wide, All-Refrigerator, Platinum Stainless

Steel Door and Grille

Model 601RG-2

601RG/F-2

601RHAG/F-2

601RG/O-2

601RHAG/O-2

601RG/S-2

601RHAG/S-2

601RG/B-2

601RHAG/B-2

601RG/P-2

601RHAG/P-2

MODEL DESCRIPTION

36” Wide, All-Refrigerator, Glass Door, Framed

Door trim with Handle, Louver Grille

(Same as above with High Altitude Glass)

36” Wide, All-Refrigerator, Glass Door, Overlay

Door Trim w/o handle, Louver Grille

(Same as above with High Altitude Glass)

36” Wide, All-Refrigerator, Glass Door, Classic

Stainless Steel Door and Grille

(Same as above with High Altitude Glass)

36” Wide, All-Refrigerator, Glass Door, carBon

Stainless Steel Door and Grille

(Same as above with High Altitude Glass)

36” Wide, All-Refrigerator, Glass Door, Platinum

Stainless Steel Door and Grille

(Same as above with High Altitude Glass)

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series General Information

1-7 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Model 611G-2

611G/F-2

611HAG/F-2

611G/O-2

611HAG/O-2

611G/S-2

611HAG/S-2

611G/B-2

611HAG/B-2

611G/P-2

611HAG/P-2

MODEL DESCRIPTION

30” Wide, Over/Under, Glass Refrig Door, Framed

Door trim w/Handles, Louver Grille (Standard)

(Same as above with High Altitude Glass)

30” Wide, Over/Under, Glass Refrig Door, Overlay

Door Trim without handles, Panel Grille (Standard)

(Same as above with High Altitude Glass)

30” Wide, Over/Under, Glass Refrig Door, Classic

Stainless Steel Door and Grille

(Same as above with High Altitude Glass)

30” Wide, Over/Under, Glass Refrig Door, carBon

Stainless Steel Door and Grille

(Same as above with High Altitude Glass)

30” Wide, Over/Under, Glass Refrig Door,

Platinum Stainless Steel Door and Grille

(Same as above with High Altitude Glass)

Model 611-2

611/F-2

611/O-2

611/S-2

611/B-2

611/P-2

MODEL DESCRIPTION

30” Wide, Over/Under, Framed Door Trim with

handles, Louver Grille (Standard)

30” Wide, Over/Under, Overlay Door Trim without

handles, Panel Grille (Standard)

30” Wide, Over/Under, Classic Stainless Steel

Doors and Grille

30” Wide, Over/Under, carBon Stainless Steel

Doors and Grille

30” Wide, Over/Under, Platinum Stainless Steel

Doors and Grille

Model 601F-2

601F/F-2

601F/O-2

601F/S-2

601F/B-2

601F/P-2

MODEL DESCRIPTION

36” Wide, All-Freezer, Framed Door Trim with

Handle, Louver Grille

36” Wide, All-Freezer, Overlay Door Trim without

Handle, Louver Grille

36” Wide, All-Freezer, Classic Stainless Steel Door

and Grille

36” Wide, All-Freezer, CarBon Stainless Steel

Door and Grille

36” Wide, All-Freezer, Platinum Stainless Steel

Door and Grille

General Information Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

1-8

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Model 632-2

632/F-2

632/O-2

632/S-2

632/B-2

632/P-2

MODEL DESCRIPTION

48” Wide, Side-by-Side, Framed Door Trim with

Handles, Louver Grille (Standard)

48” Wide, Side-by-Side, Overlay Door Trim with-

out Handles, Panel Grille (Standard)

48” Wide, Side-by-Side, Classic Stainless Steel

Door and Grille

48” Wide, Side-by-Side, carBon Stainless Steel

Door and Grille

48” Wide, Side-by-Side, Platinum Stainless Steel

Door and Grille

Model 642-2

642/F-2

642/O-2

642/S-2

642/B-2

642/P-2

MODEL DESCRIPTION

42” Wide, Side-by-Side, Framed Door Trim with

Handles, Louver Grille (Standard)

42” Wide, Side-by-Side, Overlay Door Trim with-

out Handles, Panel Grille (Standard)

42” Wide, Side-by-Side, Classic Stainless Steel

Door and Grille

42” Wide, Side-by-Side, carBon Stainless Steel

Door and Grille

42” Wide, Side-by-Side, Platinum Stainless Steel

Door and Grille

Model 650-2

650/F-2

650/O-2

650/S-2

650/B-2

650/P-2

MODEL DESCRIPTION

36” Wide, Over/Under, Framed Door Trim with

handles, Louver Grille (Standard)

36” Wide, Over/Under, Overlay Door Trim without

handles, Panel Grille (Standard)

36” Wide, Over/Under, Classic Stainless Steel

Doors and Grille

36” Wide, Over/Under, carBon Stainless Steel

Doors and Grille

36” Wide, Over/Under, Platinum Stainless Steel

Doors and Grille

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series General Information

1-9 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Model 650G-2

650G/F-2

650HAG/F-2

650G/O-2

650HAG/O-2

650G/S-2

650HAG/S-2

650G/B-2

650HAG/B-2

650G/P-2

650HAG/P-2

MODEL DESCRIPTION

36” Wide, Over/Under, Glass Refrig Door, Framed

Door trim w/Handles, Louver Grille (Standard)

(Same as above with High Altitude Glass)

36” Wide, Over/Under, Glass Refrig Door, Overlay

Door Trim without handles, Panel Grille (Standard)

(Same as above with High Altitude Glass)

36” Wide, Over/Under, Glass Refrig Door, Classic

Stainless Steel Door and Grille

(Same as above with High Altitude Glass)

36” Wide, Over/Under, Glass Refrig Door, carBon

Stainless Steel Door and Grille

(Same as above with High Altitude Glass)

36” Wide, Over/Under, Glass Refrig Door,

Platinum Stainless Steel Door and Grille

(Same as above with High Altitude Glass)

661

Model 661-2

661/F-2

661/O-2

661/S-2

661/B-2

661/P-2

MODEL DESCRIPTION

36” Wide, Side-by-Side, Framed Door Trim with

Handles, Louver Grille (Standard)

36” Wide, Side-by-Side, Overlay Door Trim with-

out Handles, Panel Grille (Standard)

36” Wide, Side-by-Side, Classic Stainless Steel

Door and Grille

36” Wide, Side-by-Side, carBon Stainless Steel

Door and Grille

36” Wide, Side-by-Side, Platinum Stainless Steel

Door and Grille

Model 685-2

685/F-2

685/O-2

685/S-2

685/B-2

685/P-2

MODEL DESCRIPTION

42” Wide, Side-by-Side, Ice/Water Dispenser,

Framed Trim w/Handles, Louver Grille (Standard)

42” Wide, Side-by-Side, Ice/Water Dispenser,

Overlay Trim w/o Handles, Panel Grille (Standard)

42” Wide, Side-by-Side, Ice/Water Dispenser,

Classic Stainless Steel Door and Grille

42” Wide, Side-by-Side, Ice/Water Dispenser,

carBon Stainless Steel Door and Grille

42” Wide, Side-by-Side, Ice/Water Dispenser,

Platinum Stainless Steel Door and Grille

General Information Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

1-10

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Model 695-2

695/F-2

695/O-2

695/S-2

695/B-2

695/P-2

MODEL DESCRIPTION

48” Wide, Side-by-Side, Ice/Water Dispenser,

Framed Trim w/Handles, Louver Grille (Standard)

48” Wide, Side-by-Side, Ice/Water Dispenser,

Overlay Trim w/o Handles, Panel Grille (Standard)

48” Wide, Side-by-Side, Ice/Water Dispenser,

Classic Stainless Steel Door and Grille

48” Wide, Side-by-Side, Ice/Water Dispenser,

carBon Stainless Steel Door and Grille

48” Wide, Side-by-Side, Ice/Water Dispenser,

Platinum Stainless Steel Door and Grille

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Installation Information

2-1 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

SECTION 2

INSTALLATION

INFORMATION

Installation Information Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

2-2

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

IF UNIT IS UNDER A SOLID SOFFIT AND CLEARANCE BETWEEN SOFFIT AND TOP OF UNIT IS GREATER

THEN 1” (25.4 mm), OR IF UNIT IS NOT UNDER SOLID SOFFIT, UNIT COULD TIP FORWARD UNDER CER-

TAIN LOAD CONDITIONS. FAILURE TO INSTALL ANTI-TIP COMPONENTS AND EXTEND LEVELERS TO

FLOOR ACCORDING TO INSTALLATION MANUAL COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS

This section covers common installation issues seen by Service Technicians. Improper installation, though not a

valid service issue, has the potential to lead to a call for service. Installation related complaints could include, but

are not limited to: Unit leveling, unit movement, door misalignment, improper door and drawer sealing, internal frost

or condensation, exterior condensation, warm compartment temperatures, etc.

NOTE: If additional installation information is needed, refer to the complete Installation Guide, or contact Sub-Zero

Service Department.

Anti-Tip Components Installation (All Models)

If anti-tip components (aka wood block / blocking kit)

need be installed, follow these steps:

NOTE: These directions are supplied with each anti-tip

package.

1. Locate and mark two wall studs at back of unit

installation location (See Figure 2-1).

2. Identify and mark proper height to clear unit top.

Space between unit top and bottom of wood block

must NOT be more then 1/4" (6.1 mm) (See Figure

2-1).

3. Using the L-brackets and screws provided, secure

wood block to wall studs, located in step 1, making

sure screws extend 7/8" (22.2 mm) into each wall

stud. The wood block must extend a minimum of 3"

(76.2 mm) over unit (See Figure 2-1).

4. Utilizing front and rear levelers, raise and level unit

until it contacts wood block.

5. Refer to Installation Guide provided with the unit for

any additional information needed.

Sub-Zero Unit

Figure 2-1. Anti-Tip Components

Wall Stud

Wood Block

Screws &

L-Bracket

Min. 3”

(76.2 mm)

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Installation Information

2-3 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 2-4. Unit Leveling

Figure 2-3. Kickplate Removal

Unit Leveling (All Models)

NOTE: Unit must be installed before final leveling. If

unit is anchored to cabinets, remove anchor screws

before leveling, reinstalled after.

1. To level unit, first remove kickplate (See Figure 2-3).

2. To raise unit front, turn front leveler legs counter-

clockwise, clockwise to lower (See Figure 2-4).

3. At front of unit base is an adjusting screw that reach-

es to rear leveler/roller assembly. To raise unit rear,

use 5/16” socket wrench to turn adjusting screw

clockwise to raise, counterclockwise to lower (See

Figure 2-4).

NOTE: Level is best checked at top & side mainframe.

Kickplate

Turn adjusting

screws

clockwise

to raise rear

Turn front levelers

counterclockwise

to raise front.

Unit Base

Dual Unit Installations

Apply

heater

to left

side of

unit that

is to

right of

other

unit.

If two or more units are placed side by side and are

2” or less apart, a dual unit heater package should

be applied to the left side of the right hand unit.

Failure to install the dual unit heater package could

result in exterior condensation between the units.

• Sales Accessory part #TTDUAL should be utilized.

(See Figure 2-2)

NOTE: Complete installation instructions are sup-

plied with the #TTDUAL package.

Figure 2-2. Dual Unit Heater

Installation Information Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

2-4

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 2-5. Top Door Hinge & Screws

Top door

hinge

Loosen & re-snug

screws to allow door

adjustment

Discard shipping

screws

Figure 2-6. Bottom Hinge Shim Installation

Bottom

Hinge

Shim

Door Adjustment (All Models)

NOTE: Unit must be level before adjusting doors.

If unit is properly installed, blocked and leveled, it may

still be necessary to adjust door(s) left to right and/or in

and out. Adjustments are performed at top and/or bot-

tom door hinge(s).

1. Working on only one hinge at a time (top or bottom),

remove and discard two small Phillips head shipping

screws from door hinge before attempting adjust-

ments (See Figure 2-5).

2. Loosen and re-snug door hinge mounting screws,

allowing door adjustment (See Figure 2-5).

3. After adjusting door, tighten door hinge mounting

screws and check for proper door seal.

NOTE: If one door on a side-by-side unit sits higher

than the other, bottom hinge shim (part #0183100) is

available. To install shim, remove shipping screws from

bottom door hinge, then loosen hinge mounting screws.

Insert shim(s) between bottom door hinge and bottom

door trim. Adjust door accordingly and retighten door

hinge screws (See Figure 2-6).

Also see Special Side-by-Side Door Adjustment instruc-

tions on following page.

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Installation Information

2-5 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Special Side-by-Side Door Adjustment

Occasionally after a side-by-side unit is properly installed, blocked and leveled, the refrigerator door top may stick

out farther then the freezer door top, even though the bottom of each door is flush. The adjustment procedure listed

below explains how to correct this. (For video showing this procedure, order part #3756530)

NOTE: Unit must be level before adjusting doors.

Special Side-by-Side Door Adjustment Procedure:

1. First - Adjust Refrigerator Door Bottom Hinge OUT:

a. Extract shipping screws from refrigerator door bottom hinge. Then, loosen & re-snug bottom hinge mounting

screws.

b. Pull refrigerator door bottom hinge corner out to outer most limit & tighten hinge mounting screws.

NOTE: Check door gasket seal by refrigerator door bottom hinge. If gasket is not sealing, loosen & re-snug

mounting screws, and push refrigerator door bottom hinge corner in slightly until gasket seals.

c. Check door alignment. If refrigerator door top still sticks out farther then freezer door, perform second adjust-

ment.

2. Second - Adjust Refrigerator Door Top Hinge IN:

a. With a pencil, trace location of refrigerator door top hinge for reference. Extract shipping screws from refrigera-

tor door top hinge, then loosen & re-snug top door hinge mounting screws.

b. Push refrigerator door top hinge corner in to inner most limit & tighten hinge mounting screws.

NOTE: Check door gasket seal around refrigerator

door. If gasket is not sealing, adjust accordingly.

c. Check door alignment. If refrigerator door top still sticks

out farther then freezer door, perform third adjustment.

3. Third - Adjust Freezer Door Top Hinge OUT:

a With a pencil, trace location of freezer door top hinge

for reference. Extract shipping screws from freezer

door top hinge, then loosen & re-snug top door hinge

mounting screws.

b. Pull freezer door top hinge corner out to outer most limit

& tighten hinge mounting screws.

NOTE: Check door gasket seal by freezer door top

hinge. If gasket is not sealing, loosen & re-snug mount-

ing screws, and push freezer door top hinge corner in

slightly until gasket seals.

c. Check door alignment. If refrigerator door top still sticks

out farther then freezer door, perform fourth adjustment.

4. Fourth - Adjust Freezer Door Bottom Hinge IN:

a. Extract Phillips head shipping screws from freezer door

bottom hinge. Then, loosen & re-snug bottom door

hinge mounting screws.

b. Push freezer door bottom hinge corner in to inner most

limit & tighten hinge mounting screws.

NOTE: Check door gasket seal around freezer door. If

gasket is not sealing, adjust accordingly.

c. Check door alignment. Minor adjustments may still be

needed at this point, adjust accordingly. Figure 2-7. Special Side-by-Side Door Adjustment

1 - OUT

2 -IN

4 - IN

3 - OUT

Installation Information Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

2-6

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 2-8. Drawer Assembly Removal

Figure 2-9. Vertical Freezer Drawer Adjustment

Rear Screws

Front Screw

Adjust slide front up

or down as required

Figure 2-10. Drawer Front Pitch Adjustment

Freezer Drawer Adjustments

(611-2/611G-2,650-2/650G-2 Prior to Serial #2354455)

NOTE: After serial #2354455, the freezer drawer is

non-adjustable.

Vertical Freezer Drawer Adjustment:

NOTE: Before attempting freezer drawer adjustment,

remove freezer drawer assembly. Pull drawer assem-

bly out, then lift at front while holding upper freezer bas-

ket in place. (See Figure 2-8)

1. Loosen two screws towards rear of each cabinet

drawer slide, and extract screw at slide front. (See

Figure 2-9)

2. Relocate front screw to desired position in drawer

slide insulator grommet (See Figure 2-9).

3. After adjustment, tighten all screws, reinstall drawer

assembly, then check door seal for proper gasket

seating.

NOTE: If freezer drawer assembly has too much play

from side-to-side, freezer drawer slide shims (part #

0232300 - front, part # 0232310 - rear) are available.

Freezer Drawer Front Pitch Adjustment:

1. Remove two 3/4” white plastic plugs from each side

of plastic drawer liner. (See Figure 2-10)

2. With 3/8” socket, loosen bolts, then adjust drawer

front pitch accordingly. (See Figure 2-10).

3. After adjustment, tighten bolts and check door seal

for proper gasket seating.

Prior to Serial

#2354455

Prior to Serial

#2354455

Prior to Serial

#2354455

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Installation Information

2-7 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 2-11. Molding Removal

Door

Panel

Door

Stick tape to

center of

trim molding

and pull

Extract screws and

handle/trim from door

Slide door panel into

door frame

Figure 2-12. Handle/Trim Removal Figure 2-13. Door Panel Install

Door Panel Installation (All Framed and Overlay Models)

1. Using a piece of tape stuck to magnetic trim molding center, pull trim molding out at midpoint to expose

handle/trim mounting screws (See Figure 2-11).

2. Extract mounting screws and handle/trim from door (See Figure 2-12).

3. Slide door panel into door frame (See Figure 2-13), then reinstalling handle/trim and magnetic trim molding.

NOTE: On Models 685/F-2, 685/O-2, 695/F-2 & 695/O-2, the glass well bezel will also need to be removed from

door before sliding door panel into door frame. See Bezel removal instructions in section 7 of this manual.

NOTE: If door panel is less than 1/4” thick, a filler panel must be installed behind door panel.

Installation Information Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

2-8

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

90° Door Stop Cam Installation (601R-2, 601RG-2, 601F-2)

Optional 90° door stop cam (part # DS90) and 105° door stop cam (part

# DS105) are available at no charge from Authorized Parts Distributors

and Product Distributors. To install:

a With door closed, extract bolts, stiffener plate and bushing from

lower cabinet hinge (See Figure 2-15).

b. Place door stop cam up over hinge pin, making sure stub on cam

fits into hole in lower cabinet hinge (See Figure 2-15).

c. Reinstall bushing, stiffener plate and bolts onto lower cabinet hinge

(See Figure 2-15).

PIN (3550770)

Figure 2-15. 90° Stop Pin (611G-2, 650G-2)

90° Door Stop Pin Installation (611-2, 650-2)

Part #3550770, 90° Door Stop Pin, is supplied with

models 611 and 650. To install:

a Remove unit grille.

b. With door closed, insert door stop pin down into

threaded hole in top cabinet hinge and tighten (See

Figure 2-14). Then, reinstall unit grille.

Figure 2-14. 90° Stop Pin (611-2, 650-2)

PIN (3550770)

90° DOOR

STOP CAM

HINGE PIN

STIFFENER

PLATE

BUSHING

Figure 2-15. 90° Stop Cam

90° DOOR

STOP CAM

E-RING

HINGE PIN

Figure 2-14. 90° Stop Cam

90° Door Stop Pin Installation (611G-2, 650G-2)

Part #3550770, 90° Door Stop Pin, is supplied with

models 611G and 650G. To install:

a Open freezer drawer.

b. Insert door stop pin up into threaded hole in lower

cabinet hinge and tighten (See Figure 2-15).

90° Door Stop Cam Installation (632-2, 642-2, 661-2, 685-2, 695-2)

Optional 90° door stop cam (part # DS90) and 105° door stop cam (part

# DS105) are available at no charge from Authorized Parts Distributors

and Product Distributors. To install:

a With door closed, place door stop cam up over hinge pin, making

sure stub on cam fits into hole in lower cabinet hinge (See Figure 2-

14).

b. Secure door stop cam by pushing E-ring into groove at end of hinge

pin (See Figure 2-14).

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Electronic Control System

3-1 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

SECTION 3

ELECTRONIC CONTROL

SYSTEM INFORMATION

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

Electronic Control System

3-2

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Term/Component Definition / Description

Control Board …………………………..The printed-circuit board (PC Board) contains the microprocessor, relays and

electrical connections which control and monitor all functions and operations

of the unit.

Microprocessor ………………………... An electrical component on the control board which receives electrical signals

from other components, processes that information, then sends an electrical

signal to the relays on the board to open or close, and other electronic com-

ponents in the unit to switch on or off.

Relay …………………………………… The electrical components on the control board which switch other compo-

nents in the unit ON and OFF when instructed to do so by the microproces-

sor.

LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) ……...... That part of the control board seen at the control panel which displays com-

partment temperatures, service indicator, door ajar alarm bell & ice indicator.

Control Panel Assembly ………………The information input and read-out area of the electronic control system,

located at the top of the upper Compartment.

Membrane Switch …………………….. An integral part of the control panel assembly, which consists of the function

keys used for all input operations to the electronic control system.

Keys (Function Keys) ………………… The buttons on the Membrane switch used for input operations. (The keys

are: UNIT ON/OFF, ALARM ON/OFF, ICE ON/OFF, WARMER, COLDER)

Indicators .....…………………………... The words and numbers that are displayed at the control panel assembly.

(Example: Temperature displays, alarm bell indicator, SERVICE indicator, and

ICE system indicator)

Error Codes .…………………………... The code numbers accompanied by the letters “EC” that appear on the LCD

during diagnostic mode if the unit experienced specific problems related to

electrical signals supplied by electrical components.

Display Units of Measure……………...Temperatures displayed at the LCD may be in fahrenheit units of measure

(°F) or celsius units of measure (°C). A series of key strokes allows the tem-

perature display units of measure to be switched to read as either °F or °C.

Set-Point ……………………………….. The desired compartment temperature, established by pressing the COLDER

or WARMER keys.

High Offset (Cut-in)………………….....As the compartment air temperature cycles up and down, the high offset is

the maximum compartment temperature that the electronic control system will

allow before calling for cooling.

Low Offset (Cut-out)…………………... As the compartment air temperature cycles up and down, the low offset is the

minimum compartment air temperature that the electronic control system will

allow before interrupting cooling.

Thermistor (Temperature Sensor) ….. A resistor with which resistance changes as the temperature around it

changes. For electronic control system purposes, the microprocessor meas-

ures this resistance and displays it as a temperature reading at the LCD.

ELECTRONIC CONTROL TERMINOLOGY & COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

All 600-2 Series units utilize an electronic control system. The electronic control system monitors, regulates and

controls a variety of functions. The electronic control system also displays temperature readings, ice maker system

operation, possible problems with the unit and door ajar alarm status. The table below defines some basic electron-

ic control system terminology and describes some of the electronic control system components. An understanding

of the following information is needed in order to comprehend the input operations and functions of the electronic

control system.

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Electronic Control System

3-3 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 3-1. Basic 600-2 Series Electronic Control System Diagram

BASIC 600-2 SERIES ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM

This page contains a basic illustration of the 600-2 Series electronic control system (See Figure 3-1). Input opera-

tions for the electronic control system are performed at the membrane switch (part of the the control panel assem-

bly), with monitoring, regulating and controlling functions taking place at the control board (located directly behind

the control panel). Temperatures and possible problems with the unit are displayed at the control panel on the LCD.

The entire electronic control system is described in greater detail on the following pages.

NOTE: The diagram below is not an exact electrical representation of the electronic control system. For more detailed

electrical diagrams refer to the wiring diagram and schematic supplied with the unit.

UNIT

ICE

WARMERCOLDER REFRIGERATOR

REFRIGERATOR

ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMER

COLDER

FREEZER

115

VOLTS

CYCLES

NEUT

RRR

RRRR

LCD

DEFROST

HEATER DEFROST TERMINATOR

ICEMAKER

WATER

SOLENOID

SOL. MONITOR LINE

MEMBRANE SWITCH

MICROPROCESSOR

DOOR AJAR

ALARM BELL

REF EVAP

THERMISTOR

FRE EVAP

THERMISTOR

REF COMPARTMENT

THERMISTOR

FRE COMPARTMENT

THERMISTOR

BOARD CONFIGURING

RESISTORS

CONTROL BOARD

LIGHTS

SWITCH

DOOR AJAR

MONITOR LINE

DEFROST MONITOR LINE

LIGHT

TERMINATOR

FREEZER

COMP REFRIG

COMP

REFRIG

EVAP FAN

FREEZER

EVAP FAN

CONDENSER

FAN

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

Electronic Control System

3-4

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

PIN 1

DISPLAY

PIN 1 0

PIN 1

E10

Figure 3-2. Control Board Layout

Figure 3-3. Control Board Summary Table (632-2/642-2 Summary Table Shown)

CONTROL BOARD LAYOUT AND SUMMARY TABLE

The electrical connection points on the control board are labeled alphanumerically. These labels correspond with

the alphanumeric control board summary table, located on wiring diagrams. By referencing the summary table, it is

possible to identify which components are connected at which connection points on the control board. Below is a

layout diagram of the control board and a copy of a summary table (See Figures 3-2 & 3-3).

NOTE: All components on control board are non-replaceable. If problems with control board are identified, the

complete control board must be replaced.

BLUE/YELLOW

ORANGE/YELLOW

BLUE/WHITE

WHITE/BLUE

GRAY/WHITE

BLUE/BLACK

ORANGE/RED

ICE MAKER VALVE SENSOR

LOW VOLTAGE THERMISTOR CIRCUITS

J1-8

J1-7

J1-6

J1-4

J1-3

J1-2

J1-1

J1-5

J4-5

J4-1

J4-4

J4-3

J4-2

FRZ COMPARTMENT

REF COMPARTMENT

DEF SENSOR

REF EVAP

REF COMPARTMENT

REF EVAP

FRZ EVAP

NOT USED(NO PIN)

REF DOOR LIGHT SENSE

FRZ DOOR LIGHT SENSE

FRZ EVAP

SENSES WATER VALVE ACTIVATION

SENSES WHEN DEF HEATER SHUTS OFF

SENSES REF CABINET

SENSES FRZ CABINET TEMP

SENSES REF CABINET

SENSES REF EVAP TEMP

SENSES IF REF DOOR OPEN

SENSES FRZ EVAP TEMP

SENSES IF FRZ DOOR OPEN

SENSES FRZ EVAP TEMP BLUE/RED

ORANGE

BROWN

TAN

CONTROL BOARD SUMMARY

ICE MAKER ACC (FILL TUBE)

C FAN

DEF HTR

RCOMP

FCOMP

E FAN

CIRCUIT

J7-3

J7-5

J7-4

J7-7

J7-6

J7-8

J7-2

J7-1

E10

ICE MAKER

NOT USED(NO PIN)

NOT USED

CONDENSER FAN

REF COMPRESSOR

POWER IN

FRZ COMPRESSOR

NEU

LITE

NEUTRAL

LIGHTS

DEFROST HEATER

DESCRIPTION

120 VOLT CIRCUITS

POWERS FILL TUBE HEATER AND ACCESSORIES

POWERS CONDENSER FAN

POWERS REF COMPRESSOR

POWERS LIGHTS

POWERS ICE MAKER

POWERS FRZ COMPRESSOR

POWER INTO BOARD

NEUTRAL INTO BOARD

POWERS DEFROST CIRCUIT

FUNCTION

YELLOW

WHITE

PINK

WHITE/RED

PURPLE

GRAY

BLACK

COLOR

BLUE

I ACC

ICE

F DR

R DR

EVAP FRZ

REF

EVAP REF

EVAP FRZ

FRZ

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Electronic Control System

3-5 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

UNITICE

WARMERCOLDER REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Jake Dog was here 632

ICE

SERVICE

OFF

600-2 SERIES CONTROL PANEL LAYOUT

NOTES:

•The illustration below is of a 632-2 control panel (See Figure 3-4).

•The control panels in models 601R-2, 601RG-2 and 601F-2 lack the obvious keys and indicators illustrated

below.

•The control panels in models 601RG-2, 611G-2 and 650G-2 include a LIGHTS ON/OFF key that is not shown in

the illustration below.

•The control panels in models 685-2 and 695-2 are mounted vertically and include a BULK ICE key.

Figure 3-4. 600-2 Series Control Panel Layout (Model 632-2 Control Panel Shown)

UNIT

ON/OFF

KEY

DOOR AJAR

ALARM ON/OFF

KEY

ICEMAKER

SYSTEM ON/OFF

KEY

REFRIGERATOR

SET-POINT

ADJUSTMENT

KEYS

FREEZER

SET-POINT

ADJUSTMENT

KEYS

LCD

Liquid

Crystal

Display

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

Electronic Control System

3-6

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Adjusting Set-Point (Temperature Adjustment)

To adjust set-points, press WARMER or COLDER key on control panel in multiple key strokes until desired set-point

is achieved (See Figure 3-6). One key stroke equals one degree change.

NOTE: The temperature range in a freezer compartment is -5°F (-21°C) to +5°F (-15°C). The temperature range in

a refrigerator compartment is +34°F (+1°C) to +45°F (+7°C).

NOTE: The initial stroke of the WARMER or COLDER key will change the previous set-point by one degree.

NOTE: The set-point will be displayed on the LCD for 10 seconds after the last key stroke. After the 10 second

delay, the compartment temperature will be displayed. As the compartment temperature changes, the temperature

displayed on the LCD will change by no more than one degree per minute.

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Figure 3-6. Adjusting Set-Point - Press WARMER or COLDER Key In Multiple Key Strokes

WHEN IN “OFF” MODE, 115 VOLTS AC IS STILL PRESENT AT CONTROL BOARD!

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Figure 3-5. Switching Unit ON or OFF - Press UNIT ON/OFF Key

BASIC ELECTRONIC CONTROL INPUT OPERATIONS

The following pages describe the basic input operations performed at the control panel. The subjects covered are:

switching unit ON and OFF; adjusting set-point (temperature adjustment); switching ice maker system ON and OFF;

enabling and disabling door ajar alarm feature, and in models 601RG-2, 611G-2 and 650G-2 only, accent lighting

system ON and OFF. Please note that though possible to display temperatures in Fahrenheit or Celsius, in most

cases Fahrenheit readings are shown.

Unit ON/OFF

All units are shipped in OFF Mode. When power is supplied to the unit, a trace of the word “OFF” is visible on the

LCD. By pressing and releasing the UNIT ON/OFF key (See Figure 3-5), power is allowed past the control board to

the rest of the unit. This is indicated by the unit’s lights energizing and LCD at the control panel illuminating with

temperature readings.

NOTE: Whenever the unit is switched OFF using the UNIT ON/OFF key, a trace of the word “OFF” will be visible on

the LCD as long as there is power to the unit.

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Electronic Control System

3-7 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Icemaker System ON/OFF

All 600-2 Series units with freezer compartments are equipped with an icemaker. When the unit first arrives in a

home, the icemaker system is off. By pressing and releasing the ICE ON/OFF key on the control panel, power is

allowed to the icemaker system and “ICE” appears on the LCD (See Figure 3-7). To switch the icemaker system off,

press and release the ICE ON/OFF key again and the “ICE” indicator disappears from the LCD, indicating the ice-

maker system is off.

NOTE: When in “Sabbath Mode,” the icemaker system is deactivated. Sabbath Mode will be explained later.

NOTE: To allow ice to freeze fully and reduce effects of low water pressure, power to the icemaker system is inter-

rupted for 45 minutes after each ice harvest. This can be bypassed for service purposes by switching the icemaker

system OFF, then back ON with the ICE ON/OFF key.

Figure 3-7. Switching Icemaker System ON or OFF - Press ICE ON/OFF Key

ICE UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Door Ajar Alarm Feature ( ) ON/OFF

All units are equipped with a door ajar alarm feature. To enable the door ajar alarm, press and release the Alarm

Bell ON/OFF key on the control panel (See Figure 3-8). The bell indicator appears on the LCD indicating the alarm

feature is active. With the alarm enabled, the bell indicator will flash and an audible alarm will beep whenever the

door is left open for more then thirty seconds. To disable the door ajar alarm, press the Alarm Bell ON/OFF key

again and the bell indicator disappears from the LCD, indicating the alarm feature is inactive.

Figure 3-8. Switching Door Ajar Alarm ON or OFF - Press ( )ON/OFF Key

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Accent Lighting System ON/OFF (Models Produced with Glass Doors Only)

Models produced with glass doors are equipped with an accent lighting system. To energize the accent lighting sys-

tem, press the LIGHTS ON/OFF key (See Figure 3-9). With the accent lighting system energized, three low intensi-

ty light strips (15 Watts each), will stay illuminated when the door is closed. To disable the accent lights, press the

LIGHTS ON/OFF key again.

UNITLIGHTS

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

Figure 3-9. Model 601RG-2, 611G-2 and 650G-2 Accent Lighting System ON or OFF -

Press LIGHTS ON/OFF Key (Model 601RG-2 Control Panel Shown)

Ice system active if “ICE” is displayed

Door Ajar Alarm active if Bell is displayed

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

Electronic Control System

3-8

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

FUNCTIONS OF THE ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM

The following pages explain monitoring, regulating and controlling functions of the electronic control system. In most

cases signal traces on a model 632-2 wiring schematic are used to show current flow for functions being explained.

Supply Power to the Lighting System

115 Volts AC are supplied to the lighting system through the control board when the unit is switched ON by pressing

the UNIT ON/OFF key. With the doors open, the light switches allows power to the lights (See Figure 3-10).

NOTE: 115 Volt AC signal to the lights is monitored by the microprocessor to control the door ajar alarm feature.

NOTE: If in Sabbath Mode, th lighting system is disabled. Sabbath Mode will be covered later.

Figure 3-10. Signal Trace Schematic of Lighting System

NEUTL1

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHTS

LIGHT

TERMINATOR

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHT SWITCH

FREEZER

LIGHTS

FREEZER

LIGHT

FREEZER

LIGHT SWITCH LIGHT

TERMINATOR

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

ORANGE

BLACK WHITE

ORANGE

BROWN

E7E2 E6E10

ORANGE

BROWN

CONTROL

BOARD

YELLOW

ORANGE

Monitor, Regulate and Display Compartment Temperatures

Temperature signals from thermistors in refrigerator and freezer compartments are monitored, then displayed on the

LCD. When a compartment reaches high offset temperature (calling for cooling), the compressor and evaporator fan

are switched on. (See Figure 3-11). When a compartment reaches low offset temperature, the compressor and

evaporator fan are switched off. Though compartment air temperature fluctuates from off and on cycles, the “aver-

age” temperature is displayed. (See Figure 3-12)

NOTE: Freezer compartment temperature range is -5°F (-21°C) to +5°F (-15°C). Refrigerator compartment temper-

ature range is +34°F (+1°C) to +45°F (+7°C).

NOTE: If average compartment temperature changes, the display will change by one degree per minute.

NOTE: A refrigerator compressor will not energize after a refrigerator off-cycle defrost unless the evaporator ther-

mistor detects temperatures 38°F (3°C), or above.

NOTE: After a freezer evaporator defrost, the freezer compressor is not energized until after the 5 minute time

delay/dwell that follows all freez-

er defrosts.

NOTE: If a refrigerator compart-

ment thermistor is faulty, the

refrigerator compressor defaults

to 20 minutes on, 40 minutes off

cycling, EE appears at right in

LCD, SERVICE flashes and

Error Code 05 is logged.

NOTE: If a refrigerator evapora-

tor thermistor is faulty, the refrig-

erator compressor will not ener-

gize until compartment air tem-

perature exceeds high offset by

5°F (3°C). SERVICE flashes

and Error Code 06 is logged.

NOTE: If a freezer compart-

ment thermistor is faulty, the

freezer compressor defaults to

20 minutes on, 20 minutes off

cycling, EE appears at left in

LCD, SERVICE flashes and

Error Code 07 is logged.

NOTE: If in Sabbath Mode, the

compartment thermistors still

control compressor operation,

except that when high offset is

reached, there is a random 15

to 25 second delay before com-

pressors are energized.

NEUTL1

FREEZER

FAN SWITCH

FREEZER

FAN MOTOR

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

FREEZER

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

RUNNING

CAPACITOR

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

REFRIGERATOR

FAN MOTOR

REFRIGERATOR

FAN SWITCH

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

REFRIGERATOR

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

RED

BLACK WHITE

WHITE

RED

E7E2 E6E10

CONTROL

BOARD

Signal from compartment

thermistors, calling for cooling in

both compartments.

GRAY

PURPLE

Figure 3-11. Signal Trace (High Voltage Only) Regulating Temperatures

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Electronic Control System

3-9 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 3-12. Average Compartment Temperature Displayed on LCD

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

Electronic Control System

3-10

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Control Condenser Fan Operation

The microprocessor senses the 115 volt AC output to both compressors. If either compressor is running, a signal is

sent to the condenser fan relay on the control board to close, supplying power to the condenser fan (See Figure 3-

13). If both compressors are off, the condenser fan will be off.

NOTE: In single compressor models (601R-2, 601RG-2, 601F-2), power to the condenser fan is supplied by the

compressor circuit. The white/red wire from the control board will not be present in those models.

NOTE: In models 611G-2 and 650G-2, the condenser fan relay also controls the door heater.

Figure 3-13. Signal Trace Schematic of Condenser Fan Operation

NEUTL1

CONDENSER

FAN MOTOR

FREEZER

FAN SWITCH

FREEZER

FAN MOTOR

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

FREEZER

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

RUNNING

CAPACITOR

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

REFRIGERATOR

FAN MOTOR

REFRIGERATOR

FAN SWITCH

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

REFRIGERATOR

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

RED

BLACK WHITE

GRAY

PURPLE

WHITE\RED

WHITE

RED

E7E2 E6E10

CONTROL

BOARD

If either compressor is running,

the condenser fan is energized.

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Electronic Control System

3-11 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Minimize Condensation on Refrigerator Door Glass (Models Produced with Glass Doors Only)

On models produced with glass doors, the refrigerator door is equipped with a 5 watt braided wire heater around the

glass perimeter to help minimize condensation formation on the glass.

• The heater in a 601RG door is on 100%.

• The heater in 611G-2 and 650G-2 doors is tied into the condenser fan circuit (see Control Condenser Fan

Operation on preceding page and Figure 3-14 below).

To help minimize condensation on the glass further, the microprocessor detects when the refrigerator door is

opened, via the light switch, then when the door closes, the evaporator fan is energized for 5 minutes. This draws

any warmer moist air away from the door glass. (See Figure 3-14)

NOTE: The evaporator fan in these models also cycles with the compressor.

Figure 3-14. Signal Trace Schematic of 611G-2/650G-2 Door Heater & Evaporator Fan Operation

RED

WHITE/REDM

PURPLE

GRAY

BLACK

WHITE

RED

NEUT

WHITE

DOOR HEATER

2300-3000 Ohms

WHITE/RED

CONDENSER

FAN MOTOR

FREEZER

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

E10E2E7E6

REFRIGERATOR

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

RUNNING

CAPACITOR

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

REFRIGERATOR

FAN SWITCH

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

REFRIGERATOR

FAN MOTOR

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

ORANGE

YELLOW

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHT SWITCHLIGHT

TERMINATOR REFRIGERATOR

LIGHTS

LIGHT

TERMINATOR

1.) 5 watt door heater on with condenser fan.

3.) Evaporator fan on for 5 minutes even

if compressor is not energized.

2.) When door is opened then closed,

mocroprocessor senses light

switch operation.

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

Electronic Control System

3-12

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Monitor and Control Refrigerator Off-Cycle Defrost

Temperature signals from the refrigerator compartment evaporator thermistors are monitored by the microprocessor.

During off cycle defrost, if the compartment temperature reaches high offset before the evaporator rises to 38°F

(3°C), the signal to run the compressor and evaporator fan will wait, allowing the refrigerator evaporator to fully

defrost before the compressor is energized (See Figure 3-15).

NOTE: If a refrigerator compartment thermistor is faulty, the refrigerator compressor defaults to 20 minutes on, 40

minutes off cycling, EE appears at right in LCD, SERVICE flashes and Error Code 05 is logged.

NOTE: If a refrigerator evaporator thermistor is faulty, the refrigerator compressor is not energized until compart-

ment air temperature exceeds high offset by 5°F (3°C). SERVICE flashes and Error Code 06 is logged.

Figure 3-15. Signal Trace Schematic (High Voltage only) of Refrigerator Off-Cycle Defrost

NEUTL1

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

REFRIGERATOR

FAN MOTOR

REFRIGERATOR

FAN SWITCH

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

REFRIGERATOR

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

160 OHMS

BLACK WHITE

GRAY

WHITE

RED

E7E2 E6E10

CONTROL

BOARD

Signal from refrigerator compartment

and evaporator thermistors, compartment

calling for cooling, but evaporator below 38°F.

No power supplied

to refrigerator compressor

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Electronic Control System

Monitor and Control “Adaptive Defrost” of Freezer Evaporator

Initially, the freezer compressor cycle-runs 12 hours. The control board defrost relay is then closed, supplying power

to the defrost, drain tube and fill tube heaters. The compressor, condenser fan and evaporator fan are switched off.

With “Adaptive Defrost”, the length of time the defrost heater stays on to open the defrost terminator bimetal

(55°F/13°C), is observed by the microprocessor via the grey w/white stripe wire to J4. This length of time is used to

calculate the number of hours before the next defrost (defrost interval). If the heater then stays on for a shorter time

period, the microprocessor increases the next defrost interval. If the heater then stays on for a longer time period,

the microprocessor decreases the next defrost interval. (See Figure 3-16) This is an ongoing process whereby the

defrost time and the defrost interval will vary by unit use.

NOTE: A 5 minute time delay/dwell follows all defrosts, during which the drain tube and fill tube heaters remains

energized. At the end of the 5 minute dwell, the compressor, evaporator fan and condenser fan are energized, and

the drain tube heater is switched off.

NOTE: Minimum defrost interval = 6 hours of compressor run time; Maximum defrost interval = 80 hours of com-

pressor run time; Maximum defrost duration = 20 minutes, plus 5 minute dwell.

NOTE: If the defrost

sensing line is open,

defrost operation

defaults to 25 minute

defrost time / 6 hour

build time, and Error

Code 22 is logged. If

the evaporator ther-

mistor detects an

under-heat or over-

heat situation at the

same time, Error

Codes 20 or 23 is

logged, respectively.

NOTE: During

defrost, the displayed

temperature is

locked.

Figure 3-16. Signal Trace Schematic of Freezer Adaptive Defrost

NEUTL1

DRAIN

HEATER

DEFROST

HEATER

DEFROST

TERMINATOR

FREEZER

FAN SWITCH

FREEZER

FAN MOTOR

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

FREEZER

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

RUNNING

CAPACITOR

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

RED

BLACK WHITE

PURPLE

GRAY\WHITE

BLUE

WHITE

E7E2 E6E10

21 OHMS

1890 OHMS

CONTROL

BOARD

Length of defrost time monitored

by microprocessor via grey/white

defrost sense line.

Freezer compressor not energized

until 5 minutes after defrost.

NOTE: If no defrost feedback signal

is present at start of defrost, an error

code will be logged.

3-13 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

Electronic Control System

3-14

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 3-17. Signal Trace Schematic of Compressor Electrical System

Figure 3-18. SERVICE & EC Flashing = Several Excessive Compressor Run Periods

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

SERVICE

Monitor Compressor Run Duration, Displays If Service is Needed (Starting with Serial #2092137)

The microprocessor observes the changing state of the compressor relays to determine the length of compressor

run time (See Figure 3-17). If a compressor runs 100% (Fre = 6 hours / Ref = 4 hours), an error code is logged (EC

40 / EC 50, respectively), and defrost is initiated, but SERVICE will not flash.

If several 100% run periods occur, and the compartment temperature does not fall to at least the set point / low off-

set temperature average (and the door is not opened during the last run period), then SERVICE will flash along with

the error code (See Figure 3-18).

NOTE: To clear a

flashing SERVICE

and EC, the problem

must be corrected,

then switch the unit

off then back on

and/or press the Bell

ON/OFF key for 15

seconds. Failure to

clear an error code

will cause SERVICE

to display constant

once Diagnostic

Mode is initiated.

NOTE: If the unit is

ever switched OFF

then back ON, the

compressor will not

energize for at least

3 minutes. This 3

minute minimum OFF

time is used to pro-

tect the compressor

and its electricals.

NOTE: Prior to serial

#2092137, SERVICE

will flash if a com-

pressor runs 100%,

but no error codes

will be logged.

NEUTL1

FREEZER

FAN SWITCH

FREEZER

FAN MOTOR

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

FREEZER

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

RUNNING

CAPACITOR

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

REFRIGERATOR

FAN MOTOR

REFRIGERATOR

FAN SWITCH

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

REFRIGERATOR

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

RED

BLACK WHITE

WHITE

RED

E7E2 E6E10

CONTROL

BOARD

GRAY

PURPLE

Length of compressor run time

is monitored by microprocessor.

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Electronic Control System

3-15 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Monitor Icemaker System and Display If Service is Needed (Starting with Serial #2092137)

The microprocessor observes the 115 Volts AC supplied to the icemaker water valve solenoid. If the solenoid is

energized for more than 15 seconds, power to the icemaker system is disabled for 24 hours (See Figure 3-19), and

an error code is logged (EC 30). If this happens five consecutive times, ICE and SERVICE on the LCD will flash

and the ICE ON/OFF key will be disabled (See Figure 3-20).

NOTE: To clear the ICE and SERVICE error indicators, and reactivate the ICE ON/OFF key, the problem must be

corrected, then the unit must be switched OFF and back ON, and the Alarm key must be pressed for 15 seconds to

clear the Error Code.

NOTE: To allow ice

to freeze fully and

reduce effects of low

water pressure,

power to the icemak-

er system is interrupt-

ed for 45 minutes

after each ice har-

vest. This can be

bypassed for service

purposes by switch-

ing the icemaker sys-

tem OFF, then back

ON using the ICE

ON/OFF key.

NOTE: When in

Sabbath Mode, the

icemaker system is

disabled. Sabbath

Mode will be covered

NOTE: Prior to serial

#2092137, ICE and

SERVICE will flash if

If the solenoid is

energized for more

than 15 seconds, but

the ice making sys-

tem will not shut

down for 24 hours.

Figure 3-19. Signal Trace Schematic of Icemaker Electrical System

Figure 3-20. ICE & SERVICE Flashing = Solenoid Energized 15 sec., every 24 hrs., 5 consecutive times

ICE UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER

SERVICE WARMERCOLDER

NEUTL1

ICEMAKER

WATER

VALVE

FILL TUBE

HEATER

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

160 OHMS

BLACK WHITE

TAN

PINK

WHITE\BLUE

E7E2 E6E10

2600 OHMS

CONTROL

BOARD 115V AC to water valve solenoid is

monitored by microprocessor.

If solenoid is energized longer

than 15 seconds, power to

icemaker system is cut.

Fill tube heater is energized 100% when ice system is

switched ON. This is not effected if solenoid is energized

more than 15 seconds.

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

Electronic Control System

3-16

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

UNIQUE ELECTRONIC CONTROL INPUT OPERATIONS

The following pages illustrate unique input operations performed at the control panel that you would not expect a

customer to perform every day. The input operations described are: Temperature Unit Selection Mode, Sabbath

Mode, Showroom Mode, Manual Compartment Disable Mode and Manual Freezer Evaporator Defrost.

Temperature Units Selection Mode (Selecting Degrees Fahrenheit or Degrees Celsius Display)

The electronic control is initially set to display temperature in Fahrenheit (°F) units of measure. Units of measure

can be converted from °F to °C (Celsius), and/or back again. This operation is called Temperature Units Selection.

NOTE: Temperature Units Selection must be performed within the first minute after switching the unit ON.

To convert temperature units of measure from Fahrenheit (°F) to Celsius (°C) readings, press and hold the door ajar

alarm bell ON/OFF key and the UNIT ON/OFF key simultaneously for 5 seconds, then release the keys (See Figure

3-21). “ °C “ will appear on the LCD indicating that temperatures will now be displayed in Celsius units of measure.

To convert back to Fahrenheit units of measure, repeat the steps above (See Figure 3-22).

NOTE: Temperature Units Selection Mode will end 10 seconds after the last key stroke.

NOTE: Do not press and hold the UNIT ON/OFF key first, that will simply switch the unit OFF.

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Figure 3-21. Converting Temperature Units of Measure to °C (within first minute after switching unit ON) -

Press and Hold Bell ON/OFF Key and UNIT ON/OFF Key for 5 Seconds

Press and hold for 5 seconds

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Figure 3-22. Converting Temperature Units of Measure to °F (within first minute after switching unit ON) -

Press and Hold Bell ON/OFF Key and UNIT ON/OFF Key for 5 Seconds

Press and hold for 5 seconds

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Electronic Control System

3-17 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Figure 3-24. Then Press and Hold UNIT ON/OFF Key for 10 Seconds

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER

OFF WARMERCOLDER

Showroom Mode

Showroom Mode was incorporated into the electronic control system so that units could be displayed in a showroom

setting. When in Showroom Mode, all cooling functions are disabled, but the lighting system remains active.

To initiate Showroom Mode, the unit must first be switched OFF using the UNIT ON/OFF key (See Figure 3-25),

then press and hold either pair of WARMER and COLDER keys, then the UNIT ON/OFF key, then release all three

keys (See Figure 3-26). To return the unit to normal operation, repeat the steps above.

NOTE: Always check set-points after returning unit to normal operation.

NOTE: It is possible to determine if a unit is in Showroom Mode by initiating Diagnostic Mode. If “Sr” is observed in

the left temperature display area during Diagnostic Mode, the unit is in Showroom mode. Initiating Diagnostic Mode

is covered later in this section.

Figure 3-26. Then Press and Hold WARMER and COLDER Keys, Then the UNIT ON/OFF Key

Figure 3-25. To Enter (or Exit) Showroom Mode, Switch Unit OFF First

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER

OFF WARMERCOLDER

Press and hold for 10 seconds

Sabbath Mode

Sabbath Mode was incorporated into the electronic control system for the observance of certain religious days.

Initiating Sabbath Mode disables the LCD, lighting system, ice making system and door ajar alarm feature.

To initiate Sabbath Mode, the unit must first be switched OFF using the UNIT ON/OFF key (See Figure 3-23), then

press and hold the UNIT ON/OFF key until the LCD and lights switch OFF, approximately 10 seconds (See Figure 3-

24). To return to normal operation, press and release the UNIT ON/OFF key.

NOTE: During Sabbath Mode, the LCD is disabled and set-points cannot be changed.

NOTE: During Sabbath Mode, the compartment thermistors still control compressor operation, except that when

high offset is reached, there is a random 15 to 25 second delay before compressors are energized.

Figure 3-23. To Enter Sabbath Mode, Switch Unit OFF First

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

Electronic Control System

3-18

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Manual Compartment Disable Mode (Starting with Serial #2092137)

Manual Compartment Disable Mode allows a customer or Service Technician to switch one compartment off for inte-

rior cleaning, defrosting, or diagnostic purposes, while allowing the other compartment to continue cooling.

To initiate Manual Compartment Disable Mode, the unit must first be switched OFF using the UNIT ON/OFF key

(See Figure 3-27), then press and hold the WARMER key for the compartment being disabled, then the UNIT

ON/OFF key, then release both keys (See Figure 3-28). The LCD will display “- -” (double dashes) in place of tem-

perature readings for the compartment chosen, indicating all cooling functions for that compartment are disabled. To

return the unit to normal operation, repeat the steps above, or press UNIT ON/OFF key.

NOTE: Always check set-points after returning unit to normal operation.

NOTE: Prior to serial #2092137, it is necessary to repeat the steps above in order to return the unit to normal oper-

ation.

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Figure 3-28. Then Press and Hold WARMER Key for Compartment Being Disabled,

Then the UNIT ON/OFF Key.

Figure 3-27. To Enter (or Exit) Manual Compartment Disable Mode, Switch Unit OFF First

Indicating that all cooling functions

for that compartment are disabled.

Manual Freezer Evaporator Defrost

Manual Freezer Evaporator Defrost was incorporated into the electronic control to assist in servicing and diagnos-

tics.

To initiate manual freezer evaporator defrost, press and hold the ICE ON/OFF key for 5 seconds, then release the

key. (See Figure 3-29).

NOTE: Manual Freezer Evaporator Defrost will not operate if unit is in Sabbath Mode.

Figure 3-29. Initiate Manual Freezer Evaporator Defrost - Press and Hold ICE ON/OFF key for 5 Seconds

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER

OFF WARMERCOLDER

ICE UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Press and hold for 5 seconds

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Electronic Control System

3-19 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

POSSIBLE ERROR INDICATORS

These pages contain diagrams illustrating what a customer may see on the LCD if there is a problem with the unit.

NOTE: To clear indicators and error codes, problem must be corrected then press Bell ON/OFF key for 15 seconds.

NOTE: For thermistor errors described below, thermistor can be tested by submersing it in a glass of ice water for 2

to 5 minutes, then check for 30,000 to 33,000 ohms.

Figure 3-34. “ICE” & “SERVICE” Flashing = Valve Solenoid energized 15 Sec., Icemaker System Disabled

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER

SERVICE WARMERCOLDER

Figure 3-30. “EE” at Left and “SERVICE” Flashing = Freezer Compartment Thermistor (or its Wiring) Fault

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER

SERVICE WARMERCOLDER

Figure 3-31. “SERVICE” Flashing and “EE” at right = Refrig. Compartment Thermistor (or its wiring) Fault

ICE UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER

SERVICE WARMERCOLDER

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER

SERVICE WARMERCOLDER

Figure 3-32. “SERVICE” Alone Flashing = Refrig. Evap. Thermistor (or its Wiring) Fault

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

SERVICE

Figure 3-33. “40”, or “50” and “SERVICE” and “EC” Flashing = Excessive Compressor Run

Figure 3-35. “SERVICE” Steady, not Flashing = Error Codes Observed in Diagnostic Mode, but not Cleared

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER

SERVICE WARMERCOLDER

Figure 3-36. “ - - ” Double Dashes Displayed = Compartment Disabled

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

Electronic Control System

3-20

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

ICE SERVICE

OFF

TROUBLESHOOTING INPUT OPERATIONS

The following few pages explain troubleshooting input operations performed at the control panel. The input opera-

tions described are Diagnostic Mode, Manual Component Activation Mode and Temperature Log Recall.

Diagnostic Mode

Initiating Diagnostic Mode allows the Service Technician to observe real-time temperature readings from all thermis-

tors without temperature averaging. If errors were registered by the thermistors or the defrost system, “Error Codes”

will also be displayed during diagnostic mode.

To initiate Diagnostic Mode, the unit must be ON, then press and hold either COLDER key, and press the UNIT

ON/OFF key, then release both keys (See Figure 3-37). If no error codes are registered, the left display area will

show real-time temperature of the thermistor, the right display area will show the thermistor location code, and all

LCD indicators will illuminate. Pressing either COLDER key or either WARMER key while in Diagnostic Mode will

toggle to the next or previous thermistor location, respectively. (See Figure 3-38, 3-39 and 3-40)

NOTE: If the COLDER and UNIT ON/OFF keys are pressed and held for 10 seconds, Manual Component

Activation Mode will be initiated (this is covered later in the section).

NOTE: Diagnostic Mode will end 20 seconds after the last key stroke.

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

ICE SERVICE

OFF

Figure 3-37. Initiate Diagnostic Mode - Press and Hold Either COLDER Key, Then the UNIT ON/OFF Key

(“F” Indicates Freezer Compartment)

Figure 3-38. Toggle Through Temperature Readings - Press Either COLDER Key or Either WARMER Key

(“r” Indicates Refrigerator Compartment)

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

ICE SERVICE

OFF

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

ICE SERVICE

OFF

Figure 3-39. Toggle Through Temperature Readings - Press Either COLDER Key or Either WARMER Key

(“FE” Indicates Freezer Evaporator)

Figure 3-40. Toggle Through Temperature Readings - Press Either COLDER Key or Either WARMER Key

(“rE” Indicates Refrigerator Evaporator)

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Electronic Control System

3-21 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Error Code Table

CODE INDICATION

05 Refrig. Cabinet Thermistor read open or shorted for 10+ seconds, or repeatedly read erratic temp’s

06 Refrig. Evaporator Thermistor read open or shorted for 10+ seconds, or repeatedly read erratic temp’s

07 Freezer Cabinet Thermistor read open or shorted for 10+ seconds, or repeatedly read erratic temp’s

08 Freezer Evaporator Thermistor read open or shorted for 10+ seconds, or repeatedly read erratic temp’s

20 Defrost Under-heat with No Voltage Feedback Through Gray/White Wire at Defrost Start

21 Defrost Overheat

22 No Voltage Feedback Through Gray/White Wire at Defrost Start

23 Defrost Overheat with No Voltage Feedback through Gray/White Wire at Defrost Start

24 Defrost Under-heat

30 Excessive Icemaker Water Valve Solenoid Activation (Exceeded 15 Seconds)

40 Excessive Freezer Compressor Run

50 Excessive Refrigerator Compressor Run

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

ICE SERVICE

OFF

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

ICE SERVICE

OFF

Figure 3-41. “EE” Observed in Diagnostic Mode = Thermistor (or its wiring) Fault in Location Indicated

Figure 3-42. “Sr” Observed While in Diagnostic Mode = Unit is in Showroom Mode

Diagnostic Mode Indicators

If “EE” is observed in the left display area during Diagnostic Mode, the thermistor in that location is open or shorted,

or there is a break in that thermistor’s wiring (See Figure 3-41).

If “Sr” is observed in the left display area when Diagnostic Mode is initiated, the unit is in Showroom Mode, which

was explained earlier in this section (See Figure 3-42).

If “EC” is observed in the right display area during Diagnostic Mode, numbers at left are “Error Codes” (See Figure

3-43). Error Codes indicate problems logged by specific components. If error codes are logged, they will appear

before temperature readings and can be toggled through with the temperature readings as described on the previ-

ous page. (See Error Code Table below and instruction on how to clear Error Codes on the next page.)

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

ICE SERVICE

OFF

Figure 3-43. Numbers at Left with “EC” at Right = Error Code

(See Table Below and How to Clear Error Codes on next page)

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

Electronic Control System

3-22

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 3-46. Initiate Manual Component Activation Mode -

Press and Hold Desired COLDER Key and UNIT ON/OFF Key for 10 Seconds

Manual Component Activation Mode

Manual Component Activation Mode energizes a cooling system for 5 minutes. When activated, the chosen com-

partment’s compressor and evaporator fan are energized along with the condenser fan. While in Component

Activation Mode, the evaporator temperatures for that compartment are displayed on the LCD. This mode also

allows the Service Technician to check for proper voltage readings at the activated components without having to

wait for the compartment to call for cooling.

To initiate Manual Component Activation Mode, the unit must be ON, then press and hold the desired compartment

COLDER key and UNIT ON/OFF key for 10 seconds (See Figure 3-46). The evaporator temperature for that com-

partment will be displayed in left display area of the LCD and the right display area will show the thermistor location.

NOTE: If the COLDER and UNIT ON/OFF keys are pressed and held for less then 10 seconds, Diagnostic Mode

will be initiated. This was covered earlier in the section.

NOTE: It is possible to toggle through the other temperature readings as in Diagnostic Mode, but in this case the

temperature readings will last for 5 minutes rather than 20 seconds.

NOTE: The compressor overload could prevent the compressor from energizing.

NOTE: Manual Component Activation Mode will end 5 minutes after initiated. It is possible to end this 5 minute run

time and return to normal operation by switching the unit OFF then back ON. If this is done, note that the electronic

control will observe a three minute minimum compressor OFF time when the unit is switched back ON. This is to

protect the compressor and its electricals.

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

ICE SERVICE

OFF

Press and hold for 10 seconds

Clearing Error Codes

If error codes are observed in diagnostic mode, a non-flashing SERVICE indicator will appear on the LCD when

Diagnostic Mode ends, indicating error codes are still logged (See Figure 3-44). To clear a non-flashing SERVICE

indicator and the error codes, the problem must be corrected and the unit must be ON. Then, the Bell ON/OFF key

must be pressed and held for fifteen seconds. The control will emit a short “beep” when the SERVICE indicator and

error codes are cleared. (See Figure 3-45)

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

BEEP!

Figure 3-45. Clear Non-flashing SERVICE Indicator - Press & Hold Bell ON/OFF Key for 15 Seconds

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

SERVICE

Figure 3-44. Non-flashing SERVICE Indicator after Diagnostic Mode = Error Codes were Registered

Press and hold for 15 seconds

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Electronic Control System

3-23 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Temperature Log Recall Mode

The electronic control system is equipped with a temperature history data storage system. This system logs/stores

the average temperature of each individual thermistor every two hours, along with any event indicators (explained

later in this section), that may have occurred. These two-hour periods are referred to as “indexes”. Up to 168

indexes can be stored for each compartment, making it possible to observe the preceding fourteen days of the unit’s

temperature history (each index equals 2 hour temperature average; 2 hours X 168 indexes = 14 days). After 168

indexes are stored, each new index will bump the oldest index. Index number “1” being the most recent two-hour

temperature average and index number “168” being the oldest. Accessing this temperature history data so it can be

viewed on the LCD is accomplished by initiating Temperature Log Recall Mode.

There are two ways to initiate Temperature Log Recall Mode. One allows viewing of compartment temperature his-

tory only (see below), the other allows viewing of compartment temperature history and evaporator temperature his-

tory (see following page).

Initiate Temperature Log Recall Mode To View Compartment Temperature History Only - Begin with the unit

ON. Now, press and hold the desired compartment WARMER key, then press the UNIT ON/OFF key, then release

both keys (See Figure 3-47). The left display area on the LCD will show average compartment thermistor tempera-

ture and in the right display area will be the index number. The first index number will be “1”, indicating the most

recent two-hour temperature average. The right display area will also flash the thermistor location code at 3 second

intervals (See Figure 3-48).

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Figure 3-47. Initiate Temperature Log Recall Mode To View Compartment Temperature History Only -

Press and Hold Desired WARMER Key, Then Press UNIT ON/OFF Key

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Figure 3-48. Thermistor Location Code Flashes Every Three Seconds

To toggle up through the indexes (from 1 to 168), press the same WARMER key in multiple key strokes (See Figure

3-49). To toggle down through the indexes (from 168 to 1), press the corresponding COLDER key in multiple key

strokes (See Figure 3-50).

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Figure 3-49. Toggle Up Through Indexes - Press WARMER Key in Consecutive Key Strokes

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Figure 3-50. Toggle Down Through Indexes - Press COLDER Key in Consecutive Key Strokes

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

Electronic Control System

3-24

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 3-53. Initiate Temperature Log Recall Mode To View Temperature History -

Press and Hold Desired WARMER Key and UNIT ON/OFF Key

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

ICE SERVICE

OFF

Figure 3-51. Initiate Diagnostic Mode - Press and Hold Either COLDER Key, then the UNIT ON/OFF Key

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

ICE SERVICE

OFF

Figure 3-52. Toggle Through Temperature Readings - Press Either COLDER Key or Either WARMER Key

Until Desired Thermistor Temperature is Displayed

Initiate Temperature Log Recall Mode To View Compartment and Evaporator Temperature History - Begin

with the unit ON and in Diagnostic Mode (See Figure 3-51). While in Diagnostic Mode, toggle through the readings

until the desired thermistor temperature is displayed on the LCD (See Figure 3-52). Now, press the WARMER key

for that compartment and the UNIT ON/OFF key simultaneously (See Figure 3-53). The left display area on the LCD

will show average thermistor temperature and in the right display area will be the index number “1” indicating the

most recent 2-hour temperature average (See Figure 3-53). The right display area will also flash the thermistor

location code at three second intervals (See Figure 3-54).

To toggle up through the indexes (from 1 to 168), press the same WARMER key in multiple key strokes (See Figure

3-55). To toggle down through the indexes (from 168 to 1), press the corresponding COLDER key in multiple key

strokes (See Figure 3-56).

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Figure 3-54. Thermistor Location Code Flashes Every Three Seconds

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Figure 3-55. Toggle Up Through Indexes - Press WARMER Key in Consecutive Key Strokes

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Figure 3-56. Toggle Down Through Indexes - Press COLDER Key in Consecutive Key Strokes

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Electronic Control System

3-25 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 3-58. SERVICE Indicator Illuminates - Indicates Unit was switched OFF During that Index Period by

Pressing UNIT ON/OFF Key

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

SERVICE

Figure 3-59. Bell Illuminates - Indicates Power Failure / Interruption During that Index Period

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Figure 3-60. Double Dashes ( - - ) Displayed Instead of Temperature for Several Consecutive Index Periods -

Indicates Bad EEPROM on Control Board. Board Must be Replaced

NOTE: Double dashes will also be observed when in Manual Compartment Disable Mode. Only when double

dashes are observed in Temperature Log Recall Mode for several consecutive indexes should the control board be

replaced.

NOTE: If Manual Compartment Disable Mode has been activated during any of the 168 indexes, average tempera-

tures will continue to be logged. No event indicator will appear with these temperatures.

NOTE: If the unit was in Showroom Mode during any of the 168 indexes, average temperatures will continue to be

logged. No event indicator will appear with these temperatures.

NOTE: If the unit was switched OFF by pressing the UNIT ON/OFF key during any of the 168 indexes and there

was still 115V AC supplied to the control board, the average temperatures will continue to be logged. This means

temperatures would be expected to rise and the SERVICE indicator would be present in all indexes in which the unit

was switched OFF.

NOTE: Temperature Log Recall Mode will end 20 seconds after the last key stroke.

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Temperature Log Event Indicators

The diagrams below illustrate possible event indicators that may be observed while in Temperature Log Recall

Mode. (See Figures 3-57 through 3-60)

Figure 3-57. “bl” Indicates Index is “blank” - No Temperature has Been Logged Yet

(Only possible within first 14 days of unit operation, or after new control board is installed during service)

UNITICE

REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

WARMERCOLDER

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

Electronic Control System

3-26

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Index= Hours Past

1 = 2 Hrs

2=4 Hrs

3=6 Hrs

4 = 8Hrs

5 = 10Hrs

6 = 12 Hrs

7 = 14 Hrs

8 = 16 Hrs

9 = 18 Hrs

10 = 20 Hrs

11 = 22 Hrs

12 = 24 Hrs (1 Day)

13 = 26 Hrs

14 = 28 Hrs

15 = 30 Hrs

16 = 32 Hrs

17 = 34 Hrs

18 = 36 Hrs

19 = 38 Hrs

20 = 40 Hrs

21 = 42 Hrs

22 = 44 Hrs

23 = 46 Hrs

24 = 48 Hrs (2 Days)

25 = 50 Hrs

26 = 52 Hrs

27 = 54 Hrs

28 = 56 Hrs

29 = 58 Hrs

30 = 60 Hrs

31 = 62 Hrs

32 = 64 Hrs

33 = 66 Hrs

34 = 68 Hrs

35 = 70 Hrs

36 = 72 Hrs (3 Days)

37 = 74 Hrs

38 = 76 Hrs

39 = 78 Hrs

40 = 80 Hrs

41 = 82 Hrs

42 = 84 Hrs

Index= Hours Past

43 = 86 Hrs

44 = 88 Hrs

45 = 90 Hrs

46 = 92 Hrs

47 = 94 Hrs

48 = 96 Hrs (4 Days)

49 = 98 Hrs

50 = 100 Hrs

51 = 102 Hrs

52 = 104 Hrs

53 = 106 Hrs

54 = 108 Hrs

55 = 110 Hrs

56 = 112 Hrs

57 = 114 Hrs

58 = 116 Hrs

59 = 118 Hrs

60 = 120 Hrs (5 Days)

61 = 122 Hrs

62 = 124 Hrs

63 = 126 Hrs

64 = 128 Hrs

65 = 130 Hrs

66 = 132 Hrs

67 = 134 Hrs

68 = 136 Hrs

69 = 138 Hrs

70 = 140 Hrs

71 = 142 Hrs

72 = 144 Hrs (6 Days)

73 = 146 Hrs

74 = 148 Hrs

75 = 150 Hrs

76 = 152 Hrs

77 = 154 Hrs

78 = 156 Hrs

79 = 158 Hrs

80 = 160 Hrs

81 = 162 Hrs

82 = 164 Hrs

83 = 166 Hrs

84 = 168 Hrs (7 Days)

Index= Hours Past

85 = 170 Hrs

86 = 172 Hrs

87 = 174 Hrs

88 = 176 Hrs

89 = 178 Hrs

90 = 180 Hrs

91 = 182 Hrs

92 = 184 Hrs

93 = 186 Hrs

94 = 188 Hrs

95 = 190 Hrs

96 = 192 Hrs (8 Days)

97 = 194 Hrs

98 = 196 Hrs

99 = 198 Hrs

100 = 200 Hrs

101 = 202 Hrs

102 = 204 Hrs

103 = 206 Hrs

104 = 208 Hrs

105 = 210 Hrs

106 = 202 Hrs

107 = 214 Hrs

108 = 216 Hrs (9 Days)

109 = 218 Hrs

110 = 220 Hrs

111 = 222 Hrs

112 = 224 Hrs

113 = 226 Hrs

114 = 228 Hrs

115 = 230 Hrs

116 = 232 Hrs

117 = 234 Hrs

118 = 236 Hrs

119 = 238 hrs

120 = 240 Hrs (10 Days)

121 = 242 Hrs

122 = 244 Hrs

123 = 246 Hrs

124 = 248 Hrs

125 = 250 Hrs

126 = 252 Hrs

Index= Hours Past

127 = 254 Hrs

128 = 256 Hrs

129 = 258 Hrs

130 = 260 Hrs

131 = 262 Hrs

132 = 264 Hrs (11 Days)

133 = 266 Hrs

134 = 268 Hrs

135 = 270 hrs

136 = 272 Hrs

137 = 274 Hrs

138 = 276 Hrs

139 = 278 Hrs

140 = 280 Hrs

141 = 282 Hrs

142 = 284 Hrs

143 = 286 Hrs

144 = 288 Hrs (12 Days)

145 = 290 Hrs

146 = 292 Hrs

147 = 294 Hrs

148 = 296 Hrs

149 = 298 Hrs

150 = 300 Hrs

151 = 302 Hrs

152 = 304 Hrs

153 = 306 Hrs

154 = 308 Hrs

155 = 310 Hrs

156 = 312 Hrs (13 Days)

157 = 314 Hrs

158 = 316 Hrs

159 = 318 Hrs

160 = 320 Hrs

161 = 322 Hrs

162 = 324 Hrs

163 = 326 hrs

164 = 328 Hrs

165 = 330 Hrs

166 = 332 Hrs

167 = 334 Hrs

168 = 336 Hrs (14 Days)

Temperature Log Index Chart

NOTE : The chart below applies to the hours in which the control has power. Temperature history data will only be

stored when the control has 115V AC supplied to it. If power to the unit is interrupted by switching the unit OFF at

the UNIT ON/OFF key or due to a power failure, the average temperatures for that time period are stored with the

event indicator. The temperature history data is stored in a non-volatile memory, so the data is not erased if power

is interrupted.

TEMPERATURE LOG INDEX CHART

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Sealed System Information

4-1 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

SECTION 4

SEALED SYSTEM

INFORMATION

Sealed System Information Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

4-2

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

HFC-134a REFRIGERANT SERVICE INFORMATION

The 600-2 Series sealed systems contain HFC-134a refrigerant. This section provides general rules for working with

134a, and procedures to be followed while servicing the sealed system. This is followed by diagrams illustrating

sealed system operation, then model-specific refrigerant flow diagrams.

134a refrigerant requires Synthetic Ester oil in the compressor, and does not tolerate contamination from

other refrigerants, moisture, petroleum-based lubricants, silicone lubricants, cleaning compounds, rust

inhibitors, leak detection dyes, or any other type of additive.

General Rules for Working with 134a Refrigerant

• Use equipment dedicated to 134a sealed system service only.

• Use only 134a refrigerant for back-flushing and sweep charging.

• Always replace the filter-drier when servicing the sealed system.

• The filter-drier must be cut from the sealed system. Never un-braze the drier as the heat will drive moisture

back into the sealed system.

• Do not leave sealed system nor replacement compressor open to the atmosphere for more than 10 minutes.

• When the rubber plugs are pulled from the service compressor, a release of pressure should be heard. If no

release of pressure is heard, do not use the compressor.

• Use ONLY virgin 134a refrigerant when recharging the sealed system.

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Sealed System Information

4-3 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

600-2 SERIES SEALED SYSTEM REPAIR PROCEDURES

Service Procedures

a. Capture refrigerant

b. Replace Compressor

c. Replace filter-drier

d. Evacuate or sweep charge system

e. Recharge system with Virgin 134a refrigerant.

NOTE: To check for a non-operating compressor, a hard start kit can be used.

a. Capture refrigerant.

b. Repair leak.

c. Replace filter-drier.

d. Evacuate or sweep charge system.

e. Recharge system with Virgin 134a refrigerant.

a. Capture refrigerant.

b. Repair leak (if at solder joint) or replace part.

c. Back flush high side of sealed system.

d. If all refrigerant has escaped & system is in vacuum, replace compressor.

e. Replace filter-drier.

f. Evacuate or sweep charge system.

g. Recharge system with Virgin 134a refrigerant.

a. Capture refrigerant.

b. Repair leak (if at solder joint) or replace part.

c. Back flush high side of sealed system.

d. Replace compressor.

e. Replace filter-drier.

f. Replace heat exchanger if cap tube is clogged.

g. Install a low side drier on suction line.

h. Evacuate or sweep charge sealed system.

i. Recharge with Virgin 134a refrigerant.

a. Capture refrigerant.

b. Locate and remove restriction or locate and replace part.

c. Back flush high side of sealed system.

d. Replace filter-drier.

e. Evacuate or sweep charge system.

f Recharge system with Virgin 134a refrigerant.

a. Capture refrigerant.

b. Replace filter-drier.

c. Evacuate or sweep charge system.

d. Recharge system with Virgin 134a refrigerant.

Problem

Non-Operating, Inefficient,

Noisy Compressor

High Side leak

Low Side Leak

Contaminated Sealed System

Examples:

> Burned out compressor

> Excessive moisture from

leak in condensate loop or in

low side

> Plugged capillary tube

Restriction

NOTE: If restriction is due to

sealed system being contami-

nated, see Contaminated

Sealed System above.

Overcharge

Sealed System Information Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

4-4

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 4-1. Compressor

Figure 4-2. Condenser

SEALED SYSTEM OPERATION

The following six diagrams illustrate a basic sealed sys-

tem. The components are listed in order of refrigerant

flow, with an explanation of their fundamental role as part

of a sealed system. NOTE: These illustrations do not

represent any specific 600-2 Series sealed system.

Compressor (Figure 4-1)

The compressor creates a high side and low side pres-

sure difference in the sealed system by compressing the

refrigerant gas, thus raising the pressure and tempera-

ture. The compressor pushes this high-pressure/high-

heat gas through the door gasket seat heater loop to pre-

vent sweating (on most units the gas also travels through

drain pan heater tubing to help evaporate water in the

drain pan). The high-pressure/high-heat gas then travels

to the condenser.

Condenser (Figure 4-2)

The high-pressure/high-heat gas travels through the con-

denser, where the heat is dissipated by cooler air being

drawn over the condenser tubing by the condenser fan.

This changes the gas into a high-pressure/warm liquid

that then enters the high-side filter-drier.

High-Side Filter-Drier (Figure 4-3)

The high-pressure/warm liquid travels through the high-

side filter-drier, which removes moisture from the refriger-

ant before it enters the capillary tube.

Compressor

Drain Pan

Heater Tubing

Door Gasket

Seat Heater

Loop

Condenser High-Side Filter-Drier

Figure 4-3. High-Side Filter-Drier

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Sealed System Information

4-5 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Capillary Tube (Part of Heat Exchanger) (Figure 4-4)

The high-pressure/warm liquid refrigerant travels through

the long skinny capillary tube which is attached to the

suction line. (These two tubes soldered together create

the heat exchanger.) As the high-pressure/warm liquid

refrigerant travels through the capillary tube it gives up

heat to the cool refrigerant gas traveling through the suc-

tion line and the pressure drops, so it is a low-

pressure/cool liquid before it enters the evaporator.

Evaporator (Figure 4-5)

As the low-pressure/cool liquid refrigerant enters the

evaporator, it vaporizes. This is caused by a dramatic

pressure change which occurs when the refrigerant

enters the larger diameter evaporator tubing from the

smaller diameter capillary tubing. This vapor travels

through the evaporator absorbing heat from the compart-

ment, gradually converting it to a cool gas. This cool gas

then enters the suction line.

Suction Line (& Heat Exchanger) (Figure 4-6)

The cool gas travels through the suction line which is

attached to the capillary tube. (As mentioned earlier,

these two tubes soldered together create the heat

exchanger.) As this cool refrigerant gas travels through

the suction line it absorbs heat from the warm liquid

refrigerant traveling through the capillary tube, making it a

luke warm gas. The lukewarm refrigerant gas returns to

the compressor where the process begins again. Figure 4-4. Capillary Tube (Part of Heat Exchanger)

Figure 4-6. Suction Line (Part of Heat Exchanger)

Figure 4-5. Evaporator

Capillary Tube

Evaporator Accumulator

Suction Line

Heat

Exchanger

Sealed System Information Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

4-6

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 4-7. Models 601R-2, 601RG-2 Refrigerant Flow

Figure 4-8. Model 601F-2 Refrigerant Flow

Freezer Compressor

Refrigerator Compressor

Refrigerator Evaporator

Freezer Evaporator

Heater Loop

Drain Pan Heater

Heat Exchanger

Condenser

High-Side Filter Drier

Heat Exchanger

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Sealed System Information

4-7 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 4-9. Models 611-2, 611G-2, 650-2, 650G-2 Refrigerant Flow

Figure 4-10. Models 632-2, 642-2, 661-2, 685-2, 695-2 Refrigerant Flow

Freezer Compressor

Freezer Drier

Freezer Heat Exchanger

Drain Pan Heater

Freezer Heater Loop

Freezer Evaporator

Refrigerator Evaporator

Refrigerator Heater Loop

Refrigerator Heat Exchanger

Refrigerator Drier

Refrigerator Compressor

Dual Condenser

Drain Pan Heater

Freezer Heat Exchanger

Freezer Compressor

Freezer Heater Loop

Freezer Evaporator

Freezer Drier

Refrigerator

Drier

Refrigerator Heater Loop

Refrigerator

Evaporator

Dual Condenser

Refrigerator Compressor

Refrigerator

Heat Exchanger

Sealed System Information Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

4-8

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Air Flow & Fan Blade Spacing

5-1 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

SECTION 5

AIR FLOW

AND

FAN BLADE SPACING

Air Flow & Fan Blade Spacing Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

5-2

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 5-1. Air Flow and Fan Blade Spacing, Model 601R-2

Clamp Down

FAN BRACKET TO FAN

BLADE HUB SPACING

1-1/4" ± 1/16"

(31.75 mm ± 1.59 mm)

Figure 5-2. Air Flow and Fan Blade Spacing, Model and 601RG-2

Clamp Down

FAN MOTOR FACE TO FAN

BLADE HUB SPACING

7/8" ± 1/16"

(22.23 mm ± 1.59 mm)

NOTE: See 601RG-2 below.

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Air Flow & Fan Blade Spacing

5-3 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 5-3. Air Flow and Fan Blade Spacing, Model 601F-2

1-1/4" ± 1/16"

(31.75 mm ± 1.59 mm)

Clamp Up

FAN BRACKET TO FAN

BLADE HUB SPACING

Figure 5-4. Air Flow and Fan Blade Spacing, Models 611-2 and 650-2

1-1/4" ± 1/16"

(31.75 mm ± 1.59 mm)

29/32" ± 1/16"

(23.02 mm ± 1.59 mm)

Clamp Down

REFRIGERATOR

FAN BRACKET TO FAN

BLADE HUB SPACING

Clamp Down

FREEZER

FAN BRACKET TO FAN

BLADE HUB SPACING

NOTE: See 611G-2 & 650G-2

on next page.

Air Flow & Fan Blade Spacing Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

5-4

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 5-6. Air Flow and Fan Blade Spacing, Models 632-2 and 642-2

Clamp Down

REFRIGERATOR

FAN BRACKET TO FAN

BLADE HUB SPACING

Clamp Back

FREEZER

FAN BRACKET TO FAN

BLADE HUB SPACING

1-1/4" ± 1/16"

(31.75 mm ± 1.59 mm)

7/8" ± 1/16"

(22.23 mm ± 1.59 mm)

Figure 5-5. Air Flow and Fan Blade Spacing, Models 611G-2 and 650G-2

29/32" ± 1/16"

(23.02 mm ± 1.59 mm)

Clamp Down

7/8" ± 1/16"

(22.23 mm ± 1.59 mm)

REFRIGERATOR

FAN MOTOR FACE TO FAN

BLADE HUB SPACING

Clamp Down

FREEZER

FAN BRACKET TO FAN

BLADE HUB SPACING

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Air Flow & Fan Blade Spacing

5-5 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 5-7. Air Flow and Fan Blade Spacing, Models 661-2

Clamp Down

7/8" ± 1/16"

(22.23 mm ± 1.59 mm)

REFRIGERATOR

FAN MOTOR FACE TO FAN

BLADE HUB SPACING

Clamp Back

FREEZER

FAN BRACKET TO FAN

BLADE HUB SPACING

7/8" ± 1/16"

(22.23 mm ± 1.59 mm)

Figure 5-8. Air Flow and Fan Blade Spacing, Model 685-2 (Prior to Serial #2271174)

Clamp Up

Clamp Down

REFRIGERATOR

FAN BRACKET TO FAN

BLADE HUB SPACING

FREEZER

FAN BRACKET TO FAN

BLADE HUB SPACING

1-1/4" ± 1/16"

(31.75 mm ± 1.59 mm)

1-3/8" ± 1/16"

(34.93 mm ± 1.59 mm)

Air Flow & Fan Blade Spacing Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

5-6

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 5-9. Air Flow and Fan Blade Spacing, Model 695-2 (Prior to Serial #2269189)

Clamp Down

REFRIGERATOR

FAN BRACKET TO FAN

BLADE HUB SPACING

Clamp Back

FREEZER

FAN BRACKET TO FAN

BLADE HUB SPACING

1-1/4" ± 1/16"

(31.75 mm ± 1.59 mm)

7/8" ± 1/16"

(22.23 mm ± 1.59 mm)

Figure 5-10. Air Flow/Fan Blade Space, 685-2 (Starting w/Serial #2271174), 695-2 (Starting w/Serial #2269189)

Clamp Down

REFRIGERATOR

FAN BRACKET TO FAN

BLADE HUB SPACING

Clamp Back

FREEZER

FAN BRACKET TO FAN

BLADE HUB SPACING

1-1/4" ± 1/16"

(31.75 mm ± 1.59 mm)

7/8" ± 1/16"

(22.23 mm ± 1.59 mm)

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Icemaker Information

6-1 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

SECTION 6

ICEMAKER INFORMATION

Icemaker Information Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

6-2

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

ICEMAKER SYSTEM INFORMATION

All 600-2 series units utilize a MidSouth icemaker.

Icemaker operation is not complex, but its components

and operation cycle should be understood by a Service

Technician in order to make proper diagnosis.

TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK, ALWAYS DISCON-

NECT ELECTRICAL POWER TO UNIT WHEN SER-

VICING ICEMAKER.

NOTE: The ICE ON/OFF key at the control panel acti-

vates the icemaker system. If “ICE” is not displayed on

the LCD, the icemaker system is off.

NOTE: To allow ice to freeze fully and reduce effects of

low water pressure, the electronic control disables the

icemaker system for 45 minutes after each ice harvest.

NOTE: The ice bucket in models 601F-2, 611-2, 611G-

2, 650-2 and 650G-2, have a tab at left rear corner that

activates a switch when the ice bucket is in place. The

ice bucket in the models 685-2 and 695-2 also activates

a switch when in place. If the ice bucket is not in prop-

er position on any model, ice production will stop.

NOTE: The defrost relay on the control board controls

the fill tube heater.

ICEMAKER COMPONENTS

Following are descriptions that explain the function of

each icemaker component. The components are dia-

gramed in Figure 6-1 on the next page.

Support - The support is the housing around the elec-

trical components and wire connections. The support is

attached to the ice mold.

Mounting Plate - The drive motor, holding switch,

water valve solenoid switch, timing gear, timing cam

and water fill adjusting screw are attached to the metal

mounting plate. The mounting plate is then attached to

the support.

Drive Motor - 115 volts AC supplied to the drive motor

causes the motor to operate. The motor has a single

output shaft with a small gear. The motor gear

drives/spins the timing gear.

Timing Gear - The timing gear is driven/spun by the

drive motor gear and is attached to the timing cam.

Timing Cam - The timing cam is attached to the tim-

ing gear and the ice ejector is inserted into the center of

the timing cam. As the timing cam rotates, high and

low spots on the cam operate the water valve solenoid

switch and the holding switch. The timing cam also

moves the lever arm side to side and rotates the ice

ejector.

Ice Mold - The ice mold is where the eight crescent

shaped ice cubes are formed.

Mold Heater - The mold heater uses 175 watts to

thaw the ice free from the mold.

Ice Ejector - The drive end of the ice ejector is “D”

shaped to fit into the “D” shaped hole in the timing cam.

It has eight blades which rotate and sweep the ice from

the mold cavities during the ejection phase of the cycle.

Ice Stripper - The stripper is attached to the dumping

side of the mold, serving as a decorative side cover and

it also prevents ice from falling back into the mold.

Bearing / Inlet - The bearing / inlet is attached to the

ice mold, opposite the support. Water enters the bear-

ing / inlet and is directed to the ice mold. The

bearing/inlet also supports the ice ejector at the end

opposite the timing cam.

Thermostat - The thermostat is a single-pole, single-

throw, bi-metal switch. At 15°F/± 3°F it closes, starting

the ice ejection phase.

Thermal-Mastic - A substance similar in appearance

to grease that is applied between the thermostat and

the ice mold. Its purpose is to increase thermal con-

ductivity between the mold and the thermostat.

Lever Arm and Shut-off Arm - The lever arm is

moved side to side by two revolutions of the timing

cam. As it moves, it raises and lowers the shut-off arm

and operates the shut-off switch to control the quantity

of ice production. If the shut-off arm comes to rest on

top of the ice in the storage bin during either revolution,

the shut-off switch will remain open, stopping ice pro-

duction at the end of that revolution.

Water Valve Solenoid Switch - A single-pole, double-

throw type switch that allows electricity to the water

valve solenoid, opening the valve, during the fill cycle.

Holding Switch - A single-pole, double-throw type

switch that assures completion of a revolution once the

icemaker has been energized.

Shut-off Switch - A single-pole, double-throw type

switch that stops ice production when the ice bin is full.

TCO (Thermal Cut Out) - The TCO is thermal protec-

tion device in the wire harness that would open in the

event of mechanical failure, thus protecting against over

heating. (The TCO is not shown in diagram.)

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Icemaker Information

6-3 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Holding Switch

Cover

Support Plate

Timing Gear

Drive Motor

Thermostat

Support

Shut-off Switch

Ice Ejector

Bearing / Inlet

Ice Mold and Mold Heater

Ice Stripper

Lever Arm

Water Valve Solenoid Switch

(Location of Thermal-Mastic)

Timing Cam

Ice Level Arm

Figure 6-1. Diagram of Icemaker Components

NOTE: For icemaker component part number, see last pages in 600-2 Service Parts Manual.

ICEMAKER OPERATION

The following series of electrical schematics illustrate a

typical icemaker cycle of operation. Below each

schematic is a diagram indicating the approximate loca-

tion of the ice ejector and ice level arm during the

phase the schematic indicates.

Freeze Phase of Ice Making Cycle (See Figure 6-2)

• The ice mold is filled with water.

• The thermostat is open.

• No icemaker components are energized.

Figure 6-2. The Freeze Phase

APPROXIMATE POSITION

OF ICE EJECTOR AND

ICE LEVEL ARM

DURING OPERATION

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

SHUT-OFF SWITCH THERMOSTAT

MOLD HEATER

WATER

SOLENOID

SOLENOID SWITCH

MOTOR

HOLDING SWITCH

NC C

TCO

ICE MOLD

ICE BUCKET

WATER

Icemaker Information Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

6-4

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Start of the First Revolution (See Figure 6-3)

• The water in the ice mold has turned to ice.

• At 15°F/± 3°F the thermostat closes.

• The mold heater is energized through the thermo-

stat.

• The drive motor is started through the thermostat

and “normally closed” terminal of the holding

switch.

• The ice ejector begins to turn and the shut-off arm

begins to rise.

Figure 6-3. Start of First Revolution

APPROXIMATE POSITION

OF ICE EJECTOR AND

ICE LEVEL ARM

DURING OPERATION

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

SHUT-OFF SWITCH THERMOSTAT

MOLD HEATER

WATER

SOLENOID

SOLENOID SWITCH

MOTOR

HOLDING SWITCH

NC C

TCO

ICE MOLD

ICE BUCKET

ICE

Figure 6-4. First Revolution Continued

APPROXIMATE POSITION

OF ICE EJECTOR AND

ICE LEVEL ARM

DURING OPERATION

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

SHUT-OFF SWITCH THERMOSTAT

MOLD HEATER

WATER

SOLENOID

SOLENOID SWITCH

MOTOR

HOLDING SWITCH

NC C

TCO

ICE MOLD

ICE BUCKET

ICE

First Revolution Continued (See Figure 6-4)

• The holding switch is tripped by the timing cam to

“normally open” thus holding power to the motor.

• The mold heater remains energized through the

thermostat.

• The shut-off arm begins to rise.

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Icemaker Information

6-5 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

First Revolution Continued (See Figure 6-5)

• The ice ejector reach the ice in the mold.

• The ice releases from the mold as the ejector

blades begin to rotate the cubes out.

• The drive motor remains energized through the

holding switch.

• The mold heater remains energized through the

thermostat.

• As the shut-off arm rises, the shut off switch is

tripped to “normally closed”, and then the shut-off

arm begins to lower.

Figure 6-5. First Revolution Continued

APPROXIMATE POSITION

OF ICE EJECTOR AND

ICE LEVEL ARM

DURING OPERATION

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

SHUT-OFF SWITCH THERMOSTAT

MOLD HEATER

WATER

SOLENOID

SOLENOID SWITCH

MOTOR

HOLDING SWITCH

NC C

TCO

ICE MOLD

ICE BUCKET

ICE

Figure 6-6. First Revolution Continued

APPROXIMATE POSITION

OF ICE EJECTOR AND

ICE LEVEL ARM

DURING OPERATION

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

SHUT-OFF SWITCH THERMOSTAT

MOLD HEATER

WATER

SOLENOID

SOLENOID SWITCH

MOTOR

HOLDING SWITCH

NC C

ICE MOLD

ICE BUCKET

ICE

TCO

First Revolution Continued (See Figure 6-6)

• The ice has released from the mold.

• The motor remains energized through the holding

switch.

• The shut-off arm is lowered and the shut off switch

is tripped to “normally open”.

• The water valve solenoid switch is tripped by the

timing cam, but the solenoid is not energized

because the thermostat is still closed and energiz-

ing the mold heater. (Electric current follows the

path of least resistance.)

Icemaker Information Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

6-6

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

End of First Revolution (See Figure 6-7)

• The water valve solenoid switch is tripped by the

timing cam back to “normally open.”

• The timing cam trips the holding switch to “normally

close,” which ends the first revolution, but the ther-

mostat is still closed, so the motor is again started.

• The mold heater remains energized through the

thermostat.

Figure 6-7. End of First Revolution

APPROXIMATE POSITION

OF ICE EJECTOR AND

ICE LEVEL ARM

DURING OPERATION

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

SHUT-OFF SWITCH THERMOSTAT

MOLD HEATER

WATER

SOLENOID

SOLENOID SWITCH

MOTOR

HOLDING SWITCH

NC C

ICE MOLD

ICE BUCKET

ICE

TCO

Figure 6-8. Start of Second Revolution

APPROXIMATE POSITION

OF ICE EJECTOR AND

ICE LEVEL ARM

DURING OPERATION

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

SHUT-OFF SWITCH THERMOSTAT

MOLD HEATER

WATER

SOLENOID

SOLENOID SWITCH

MOTOR

HOLDING SWITCH

NC C

ICE MOLD

ICE BUCKET

ICE

TCO

Start of Second Revolution:(See Figure 6-8)

• The water valve solenoid switch is tripped by the

timing cam back to “normally open.”

• The timing cam trips the holding switch to “normally

close,” which ends the first revolution, but the ther-

mostat is still closed, so the motor is again started.

• The mold heater remains energized through the

thermostat.

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Icemaker Information

6-7 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Second Revolution Continued (See Figure 6-9)

• The mold heater has warmed the thermostat, so the

thermostat opens, and the mold heater is de-ener-

gized.

• If the shut-off arm comes to rest on top of the ice in

the storage bin (as illustrated), so the shut-off

switch will remain in the “normally closed” position.

• The motor remains energized through the holding

switch.

Figure 6-9. Second Revolution Continued

APPROXIMATE POSITION

OF ICE EJECTOR AND

ICE LEVEL ARM

DURING OPERATION

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

SHUT-OFF SWITCH THERMOSTAT

MOLD HEATER

WATER

SOLENOID

SOLENOID SWITCH

MOTOR

HOLDING SWITCH

NC C

ICE MOLD

ICE BUCKET

ICE

TCO

Figure 6-10. Second Revolution Continued

APPROXIMATE POSITION

OF ICE EJECTOR AND

ICE LEVEL ARM

DURING OPERATION

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

SHUT-OFF SWITCH THERMOSTAT

MOLD HEATER

WATER

SOLENOID

SOLENOID SWITCH

MOTOR

HOLDING SWITCH

NC C

ICE MOLD

ICE BUCKET

ICE

TCO

Second Revolution Continued (See Figure 6-10)

• The water valve solenoid switch is tripped by the

timing cam. This time the solenoid is energized

because the thermostat is open. The water sole-

noid is open for approximately seven seconds, fill-

ing the ice mold with water.

• the mold heater is energized through the solenoid

switch and holding switch.

Icemaker Information Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

6-8

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 6-11. End of Ice Making Cycle

APPROXIMATE POSITION

OF ICE EJECTOR AND

ICE LEVEL ARM

DURING OPERATION

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

SHUT-OFF SWITCH THERMOSTAT

MOLD HEATER

WATER

SOLENOID

SOLENOID SWITCH

MOTOR

HOLDING SWITCH

NC C

TCO

ICE MOLD

ICE BUCKET

WATER

ICE

End of Ice making Cycle (See Figure 6-11)

• The water valve solenoid switch is tripped by the

timing cam back to “normally open” ending the

water fill.

• The timing cam trips the holding switch to “normally

close,” which ends the second revolution.

• The thermostat is still open, so it does not start the

drive motor.

• If the shut-off arm has come to rest on top of the

ice in the storage bin (as illustrated), the shut-off

switch remains in the “normally closed” position.

This interrupts power from reaching the thermostat,

until sufficient ice has been removed from the stor-

age bin allowing the shut-off arm to lower.

NOTE: To allow ice to freeze fully and reduce effects of

low water pressure, the electronic control system dis-

ables the icemaker system for 45 minutes after each ice

harvest.

Figure 6-12. Stopping Icemaker

Arm DOWN,

Icemaker will Operate

Arm UP,

Icemaker will Stop

MANUALLY STOPPING ICE PRODUCTION

Ice production can be manually stopped four ways:

1. Press the ICE ON/OFF key on the control panel so

that “ICE” is not displayed on the LCD.

2. In model 632-2 and 642-2, trip icemaker switch

above the ice bucket to the OFF position.

3. In models 601F-2, 611-2, 611G-2, 650-2, 650G-2,

685-2 and 695-2, remove ice bucket so that ice-

maker switch at back of freezer is not being

depressed. Also, make sure no food product is

coming in contact with icemaker switch.

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Icemaker Information

6-9 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

MANUALLY STARTING THE ICEMAKER

NOTE: To allow ice to freeze fully and reduce effects of

low water pressure, the electronic control disables the

icemaker system for 45 minutes after each ice harvest.

To bypass this 45 minute dwell for service purposes,

press the the ICE ON/OFF key at the control panel.

Manual Start Procedure:

1. Pry the icemaker front cover from the support using

a flat-blade screwdriver or coin.

2. With a flat-blade screwdriver, turn the drive gear

counterclockwise until the holding switch is activat-

ed, completing the circuit to the drive motor (this

will be about a 1/8 turn). (See Figure 6-13) The

icemaker will then complete its cycle automatically.

NOTE: If after 1/4 turn the icemaker is not running

on its own, it may be in the 45 minute dwell period

or there is an electrical or mechanical problem.

ADJUSTING ICEMAKER WATER FILL LEVEL

Proper water fill level for a MidSouth icemaker is 100 -

110 cc’s (3.5 - 3.75 oz). If the fill level is checked and

needs to be adjusted, turn the water fill adjusting screw

clockwise to reduce fill level, or counterclockwise to

increase fill level. One full turn of the screw equals 15

cc’s. (See Figure 6-14)

NOTE: Always check fill level before making any

adjustments of the water fill adjusting screw.

Figure 6-13. Manually Start Icemaker

Turn Drive Gear

Counterclockwise

Figure 6-14. Adjust Water Fill Level

Water Fill Adjusting Screw

1 Full Turn Equals 15 CC's

Turn Clockwise to Reduce Fill

Icemaker Information Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

6-10

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

7-1

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

SECTION 7

COMPONENT ACCESS

AND REMOVAL

7-2

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

COMPONENT ACCESS AND REMOVAL

This section explains how to adjust, access and remove components. If different models have similar procedures,

they are grouped together under the appropriate heading. The models covered in the procedures are listed between

brackets after the heading.

This section is arranged as follows: Page:

• Exterior Cosmetic / Mechanical (All Models) ............................................................................................................................. 7-3

• Refrigerator Interior Cosmetic / Mechanical (All Models) ......................................................................................................... 7-15

• Freezer Interior Cosmetic / Mechanical (Model 601F-2) .......................................................................................................... 7-24

• Freezer Interior Cosmetic / Mechanical (Models 611-2, 611G-2, 650-2, 650G-2) ................................................................... 7-30

• Freezer Interior Cosmetic / Mechanical (Models 632-2, 642-2, 661-2) .................................................................................... 7-36

• Freezer Interior Cosmetic / Mechanical (Models 685-2 -prior to serial #2271174, 695-2 -prior to serial #2269189) .......... 7-42

• Freezer Interior Cosmetic / Mechanical (Models 685-2 -starting w/serial #2271174, 695-2 -starting w/serial #2269189) .. 7-48

• Lower Compressor Area Mechanical (Models 601R-2, 601RG-2, 601F-2) ............................................................................. 7-55

• Upper Compressor Area Mechanical (All Models Except 601’s) ............................................................................................ 7-56

• Sealed System (Models 601R-2, 601RG-2, 601F-2) ............................................................................................................... 7-57

• Sealed System (All Models Except 601’s) ............................................................................................................................... 7-61

An attempt has been made to arrange these procedures in such a way as to simulate which components would

need to be removed first in order to gain access to other components. When following a component removal proce-

dure, it may be necessary to reference another component removal procedure earlier in this section.

NOTE: Before continuing, please take note of the WARNINGS and CAUTIONS below.

•IF IT IS NECESSARY TO REMOVE A UNIT FROM ITS INSTALLATION, REMEMBER THAT THE UNIT COULD

TIP FORWARD WHEN PULLED FORWARD BEYOND THE ANTI-TIP COMPONENTS, RESULTING IN SERI-

OUS INJURY OR DEATH. PULLING A UNIT FROM ITS INSTALLATION SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY

AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE TECHNICIAN OR INSTALLER.

•TO AVOID ELECTRIC SHOCK, POWER TO THE UNIT MUST BE DISCONNECTED WHENEVER ACCESSING

AND/OR REMOVING COMPONENTS POWERED BY ELECTRICITY OR COMPONENTS NEAR OTHER

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS. IF THE UNIT IS PLUGGED IN, BUT HAS NOT BEEN SWITCHED ON BY

PRESSING THE UNIT ON/OFF KEY, 115 VOLTS AC IS STILL PRESENT AT THE CONTROL BOARD.

•IF REMOVING A DOOR OR DRAWER FROM A UNIT, REMEMBER THAT DOORS AND DRAWERS ARE

HEAVY. IF THEY WERE TO FALL, THEY COULD CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY.

• If removing or disconnecting door closer assemblies, remember they are spring loaded and could recoil

quickly when released.

•If working in the compressor area, remember that compressor and tubing may be hot.

•If working on or around an evaporator or condenser, remember that evaporator and condenser fins are

sharp.

7-3

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Bottom Mount Standard Louvered Grille (601R-2, 601RG-2, 601F-2)

The bottom mount standard louvered grille consists of a

lower and upper grille section.

Lower Grill Section Removal - To remove lower grille

section (See Figure 7-1):

1. Extract screws at bottom left and right corners of

lower grille section.

2. Pull bottom of lower grille section out and up to

release it from upper grille section.

Upper Grill Section Removal - To remove upper grille

section (See Figure 7-1):

EXTERIOR COSMETIC / MECHANICAL (ALL MODELS)

UPPER GRILLE SECTION HOLDS FAN AND LIGHT

SWITCHES. DISCONNECT POWER TO UNIT

BEFORE REMOVING UPPER GRILLE SECTION.

1. Remove lower grille section first.

2. Open cabinet door and extract screws at top left and right corners of upper grille section.

3. Pull upper grille section forward slightly and disconnect electrical leads from fan and light switches.

Bottom Mount Stainless Steel Grille (601R-2, 601RG-2, 601F-2)

The bottom mount stainless steel grille consists of a lower and upper grille section. The lower grill section uses a

“catch and strike” retention system.

Lower Grill Section Removal - To remove lower grille section (See Figure 7-2):

1. Grasp bottom of grille and pull out and up to release strike from catch at bottom.

2. Continue to pull bottom out and up to release it from

upper grille section.

Upper Grill Section Removal - To remove upper grille

section (See Figure 7-2):

Figure 7-2. Stainless Steel Grille

UPPER GRILLE SECTION HOLDS FAN AND LIGHT

SWITCHES. DISCONNECT POWER TO UNIT

BEFORE REMOVING UPPER GRILLE SECTION.

1. Remove lower grille section first.

2. Open cabinet door and extract screws at top left

and right corners of upper grille section.

3. Pull upper grille section forward slightly and discon-

nect electrical leads from fan and light switches.

Upper Grille

Screw

Pull out and up

Lower Grille Section

Upper Grille Section

Figure 7-1. Louvered Grille

Upper Grille

Screw

Pull out and up

Lower Grille Section

Upper Grille Section

Lower

Grille

Screw

7-4

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Top Mount Standard & Stainless Steel Louvered

Grille (All models except 601’s)

To remove a top mount louvered grille assembly (See

Figure 7-3):

1. Open door(s).

2. Extract grille screws which pass up through top

mainframe extrusion into bottom extrusion of grille

assembly.

3. Tilt top of grille forward and release grille springs

from grille hooks at back side of grille, then lift grille

assembly off.

Top Mount Panelized Grille Assembly

(All models except 601’s)

The panelized grille assembly consists of an outer and

inner grille frame. The outer grille frame is attached to

the unit with screws. Pegs on the back of the inner

grille frame fit into keyhole slots in the outer grille frame.

Inner Grille Frame Removal - To remove the inner

grille frame (See Figure 7-4):

1. Lift inner grille frame up.

2. Pull bottom of inner grille frame out of bottom key-

hole slots.

3. Pull inner grille frame down and out of top keyhole

slots.

Outer Grille Frame Removal - To remove the outer

grille frame (See Figure 7-5):

1. Remove inner grille frame first.

2. Open door(s).

3. Extract grille screws which pass up through top

mainframe extrusion into bottom extrusion of outer

grille frame.

4. Extract screws at top front of outer grille frame and

lift frame off.

Figure 7-3. Louver Grille

Figure 7-4. Inner Panelized Grille Frame

Figure 7-5. Outer Panelized Grille Frame

Grille

Screws

Grille

Springs

Louvered

Grille

Inner Grille Frame

Outer Grille Frame

Grille

Screws

7-5

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Kickplate (All Models)

Extract screws at bottom left and right corners of kick-

plate and pull kickplate forward (See Figure 7-6).

Drain Pan (601R-2, 601RG-2, 601F-2)

The side flanges at the top of the plastic drain pan rest

on top of metal flanges behind the kickplate. Z-clamps

are used to secure the drain pans top flange to the unit

tray side flange.

To remove a drain pan (See Figure 7-7):

1. Remove lower grille section.

2. Remove kickplate.

3. Push drain pan up and out from underneath.

Drain Pan (All models except 601’s)

The drain pan slides in from the front of the unit on two

side brackets, coming to rest on a rear bracket. A lock-

ing feature was built into the drain pan in the form of

detentes at the bottom front that drop into notches at

the front of the side brackets.

To remove a drain pan (See Figure 7-8):

1. Remove kickplate.

2. Push front of drain pan up slightly and pull forward.

Figure 7-6. Kickplate

Kickplate

Screw

Figure 7-7. Drain Pan (601’s)

Drain Pan

Figure 7-8. Drain Pan

Drain Pan

7-6

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Light and Fan Switch (601R-2, 601RG-2, 601F-2)

Light / fan switches are mounted in upper grille section.

To remove a switch, the lower and upper grille sections

must be removed first, then (See Figure 7-9):

1. Disconnect wire leads from switch.

2. Depress tab on side of switch while pushing switch

out of the opening in upper grille section.

Light and Fan Switch (All models except 601’s)

Light and fan switches are mounted in top mainframe.

To remove a switch, first remove the grille, then (See

Figure 7-10):

1. Remove switch enclosure directly behind top main-

frame extrusion.

2. Disconnect wire leads from switch.

3. Open refrigerator or freezer door below switch.

4. Depress tab on side of switch while pushing switch

down, out of the opening in mainframe extrusion.

Figure 7-10. Switch

Figure 7-9. Switch (601’s)

Light Switch

Fan Switch

Mainframe

Light Switch Fan Switch

Upper Grill

Section

7-7

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 7-11. Water Valve

Key-hole Slot

Bracket

Water Valve

(611-2, 611G-2, 632-2, 642-2, 650-2, 650G-2, 661-2)

NOTE: For 601F-2 water valve removal instructions

see: “LOWER COMPRESSOR AREA MECHANICAL

(Models 601R-2, 601RG-2, 601F-2)”, later in this sec-

tion.

NOTES:

•For 685-2 (Starting w/Serial #2271174) / 695-2

(Starting w/Serial #2269189), dual water valve

removal instructions, see next page.

•For 685-2 (Prior to Serial #2271174) / 695-2 (Prior

to Serial #2269189), dual water valve removal

instructions see: “UPPER COMPRESSOR AREA

MECHANICAL (All Models Except 601’s)”, later in

this section.

The water valve is mounted to a bracket under the unit.

To remove a water valve, first remove the kickplate,

then (See Figure 7-11):

1. Loosen mounting screw holding valve to bracket.

2. Lift valve until screw head aligns with large section

of key-hole slot.

3. Push valve back until screw head clears bracket,

then lower valve and pull forward.

4. Disconnect electrical leads from valve.

5. Disconnect water lines from valve.

Dual Water Valve

(685-2 Starting with Serial #2271174)

(695-2 Starting with Serial #2269189)

NOTE: For 685-2 / 695-2, prior to serial numbers listed

above, see: “UPPER COMPRESSOR AREA MECHAN-

ICAL (All Models Except 601’s)”.

The water valve is mounted to a bracket under the unit,

toward the right hand side. The inlet water line uses a

compression fitting. The water valve outlets are quick-

connect fittings.

To remove a water valve, first remove the kickplate,

then (See Figure 7-12):

1. Extract mounting screw holding valve to bracket.

2. Pull valve forward.

4. Disconnect electrical leads from valve.

5. Disconnect water lines from valve.

Figure 7-12. Dual Water Valve

Bracket

Water Valve

7-8

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Tubular Stainless Steel Door Handle Assembly

(All Stainless Steel Models)

A screw inserted through the handle standoff into the

handle secures the handle to the standoff. The standoff

then slides over a threaded insert that is attached to the

door shell, and a socket head set-screw inserted

through the side of the standoff secures the standoff to

the insert.

To remove a stainless steel handle assembly, use a

3/32” Allen-wrench to loosen the set-screw in each han-

dle standoff and pull handle assembly off of the thread-

ed insert. (See Figure 7-14)

Full Length Door Handle/Handle-Side Trim

(All Models)

A Full length handle and/or handle-side trim is secured

to the door with screws. The screw heads are then

concealed by a magnetic trim strip.

To remove a full length handle or handle-side trim (See

Figure 7-15):

1. Press a sticky piece of tape to center of magnetic

trim strip.

2. Pull tape so that trim strip bows away from door,

disengaging both ends of trim strip from the end-

caps.

3. With mounting screws exposed, extract the screws,

then pull handle (or handle-side trim) from door.

Hinge-Side Door Trim (All Models)

Hinge-side door trim is held to the door with screws.

To remove hinge-side door trim (See Figure 7-16):

1. Open Door fully.

2. Extract trim mounting screws.

3. Pull trim from door.

Figure 7-14. SS Handle w/Cut-Away View

Figure 7-15. Magnetic Trim Strip / Handle

Figure 7-16. Hinge-side Trim

Handle

Standoff

Threaded

Insert

Set-Screw

Handle

Mount

Screw

SS HANDLE

STAND

OFF

STAND

OFF

DOOR

Tape

Trim

Strip Handle

Door Trim

7-9

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Dispenser Control Panel (685-2, 695-2)

The dispenser control panel is held in place over the

bezel and in front of the dispenser assembly by plastic

rivets passing up through its bottom flange and into the

dispenser assembly.

To remove the control panel (See Figures 7-17 and 7-

18):

1. Extract plastic rivet center posts using a fingernail,

putty knife, or similar device, then pull rivets out.

2. Pull panel down and disconnect ribbon cable.

NOTE: When reassembling, make sure blue side

of ribbon cable is up when connecting to dispenser

control panel, and take care not to pinch or kink rib-

bon cable.

Bezel (685-2, 695-2)

To remove a bezel, the control panel must be removed

first, then (See Figure 7-19):

1. Lift out glasswell grille to access bottom screws.

2. Extract all screws at corners, then pull bezel for-

ward.

ICE

WATER

LIGHT

Figure 7-17. Dispenser Control Panel

Figure 7-19. Bezel

Figure 7-18. Dispenser Control Panel

Bezel

Extract

plastic

rivets

Disconnect

ribbon

cable

7-10

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Glasswell Liner/Sump (685-2, 695-2)

The glasswell liner sets into a groove in the sump.

These two components are then installed as an assem-

bly, with the top of the liner fitting up into a groove at

the bottom of the dispenser assembly, and two plastic

rivets hold the liner to the dispenser assembly.

To remove the glasswell liner/sump assembly, the con-

trol panel and bezel must be removed first, then (See

Figures 7-20 and 7-21):

1. Extract plastic rivet center posts using a fingernail,

putty knife, or similar device, then pull rivets out.

2. Detach ground wire from glasswell liner at top right.

3. Pull bottom of assembly out while lifting up.

NOTE: When reassembling, top edge of liner must

fit into the groove at bottom of dispenser assembly.

Dispenser Assembly (685-2, 695-2)

The dispenser assembly sits above the glasswell liner

and is held in position with four screws.

To remove the dispenser assembly, the control panel,

bezel and glasswell liner/sump assembly must be

removed first, then (See Figures 7-22):

1. Extract front and back dispenser assembly mount-

ing screws.

2. Pull assembly down and disconnect wires.

NOTE: When reassembling, take care not to pinch

or kink ribbon cable, and be sure to test for proper

control panel / dispenser assembly operation before

leaving.

Figure 7-20. Glasswell Liner/Sump

Figure 7-22. Dispenser Assembly

Figure 7-21. Dispenser Assembly

Extract

screws, pull

assembly

down and

disconnect

wires.

Extract

plastic

rivets

Pull bottom

out while

lifting up

Liner &

Sump

7-11

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Door Closer Assembly

(All Models Except 611-2 & 650-2)

NOTE: Door closer assembly removal and door closer

disconnection procedures are different. If disconnecting

a door closer in order to remove a door, see Door

Removal instructions instead of these instructions.

To remove a door closer assembly (See Figure 7-23):

1. With door closed, use a small straight-blade screw-

driver to remove E-ring which holds door closer arm

to bottom door hinge stud.

2. Pry door closer arm down off of door hinge stud.

Door Assembly (601R-2, 601F-2, 632-2, 642-2, 611-2,

650-2, 661-2, 685-2 Fre, 695-2 Fre)

Figure 7-23. Door Closer

Remove

E-Ring

Pry down

REFRIGERATOR DOORS:

• ON GLASS DOOR MODELS HAVE HEATER

WIRES THAT PASS THROUGH TOP HINGE.

• ON MODELS 685-2 / 695-2 HAVE DISPENSER

WIRES THAT PASS THROUGH TOP HINGE.

FAILURE TO DISCONNECT THESE WIRES DURING

DOOR REMOVAL COULD CAUSE SERIOUS PER-

SONAL INJURY, AND/OR DAMAGE TO APPLIANCE.

SEE APPROPRIATE DOOR REMOVAL PROCE-

DURES ON FOLLOWING PAGE.

To remove a door, the door closer assembly must be

disconnected fist (excluding 611-2 and 650-2).

Door Closer Disconnection - To disconnect a door

closer (See Figure 7-24):

1. Open door until hole in bottom cabinet hinge aligns

with hole in door closer arm.

2. Insert short screwdriver up into the two holes.

NOTE: This screwdriver will be used to pry the

door closer arm back onto the door hinge stud.

3. Use a small straight-blade screwdriver to remove E-

ring which holds door closer arm to bottom door

hinge stud.

4. Pry door closer arm down off of door hinge stud.

Door Removal - To remove a door (See Figure 7-25):

1. Remove hinge-side door trim, if applicable.

2. With a 1/8” Allen-wrench and Phillips screwdriver,

extract all screws from top door hinge.

3. Lean door away from unit and lift off of bottom cabi-

net hinge.

NOTE: When reinstalling door, use screwdriver in

cabinet hinge hole and door closer arm hole to pry

door closer arm back onto the door hinge stud.

Figure 7-24. Door Closer Disconnect

Remove

E-Ring

Pry down

Screwdriver

up into holes

Figure 7-25. Door

Lean door away

from unit and lift up

7-12

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Door Assembly (601RG-2, 611G-2, 650G-2, 685-2

Refrigerator, 695-2 Refrigerator)

To remove a door, the door closer assembly must be

disconnected fist (excluding 611G-2 and 650G-2).

Door Closer Disconnection - To disconnect a door

closer (See Figure 7-26):

1. Open door until hole in bottom cabinet hinge aligns

with hole in door closer arm.

2. Insert short screwdriver up into the two holes.

NOTE: This screwdriver will be used to pry the

door closer arm back onto the door hinge stud.

3. Use a small straight-blade screwdriver to remove E-

ring which holds door closer arm to bottom door

hinge stud.

4. Pry door closer arm down off of door hinge stud.

Door Removal - To remove a door (See Figures 7-27

and 7-28):

1. Disconnect electrical leads at top cabinet hinge.

2. Extract top cabinet hinge mounting bolts.

3. Lean door away from unit and lift off of bottom cabi-

net hinge.

NOTE: When reinstalling door, use screwdriver in

cabinet hinge hole and door closer arm hole to pry

door closer arm back onto the door hinge stud.

Figure 7-26. Door Closer Disconnect

Remove

E-Ring

Pry down

Screwdriver

up into holes

Figure 7-28. Door

Lean door away

from unit and lift up

Figure 7-27. Door Electrical Leads

Electrical leads

Cabinet hinge

mounting bolts

REFRIGERATOR DOORS:

• ON GLASS DOOR MODELS HAVE HEATER

WIRES THAT PASS THROUGH TOP HINGE.

• ON MODELS 685-2 / 695-2 HAVE DISPENSER

WIRES THAT PASS THROUGH TOP HINGE.

FAILURE TO DISCONNECT THESE WIRES DURING

DOOR REMOVAL COULD CAUSE SERIOUS PER-

SONAL INJURY, AND/OR DAMAGE TO THE APPLI-

ANCE.

7-13

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Freezer Drawer Assembly

(611-2/611G-2,650-2/650G-2 Prior to Serial #2354455)

To remove freezer drawer assembly (See Figure 7-29):

1. Open drawer fully.

2. Pull upper basket to front of drawer.

3. While holding upper basket in place, lift front of

drawer up while pulling forward.

Freezer Drawer Front Assembly

(611-2/611G-2,650-2/650G-2 Start w/Serial #2354455)

To remove a freezer drawer front assembly (See Figure

7-29A):

1. Open freezer drawer fully.

2. Extract the Allen-head screws that pass through the

drawer slide rail assemblies into the rear of the

drawer front assembly.

3. Pull drawer front assembly from drawer slide rails.

Freezer Drawer Side Trim

(611-2, 611G-2, 650-2, 650G-2)

The freezer drawer side trim slides down over trim clips

that are riveted to the sides of the drawer.

To remove freezer drawer side trim (See Figure 7-30):

1. Remove Freezer drawer handle.

2. Slide side trim up off of trim clips

Figure 7-29. Drawer Assembly

Hold upper basket

in place, lift up and

pull forward.

Extract Screws

Drawer Front Assy

Figure 7-30. Drawer Trim

Side Trim

Trim Clip

Figure 7-29A. Drawer Front Assembly

Prior to Serial

#2354455

Starting w/Serial

#2354455

7-14

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Mainframe Extrusion (All Models)

Mainframe extrusion is held to the sides of a unit with

low-profile 6-lobe drive screws, and at the top with

Phillips-head screws. Mainframe angles at the top cor-

ners strengthen and support mainframes at a 90° angle.

Side Mainframe Extrusion, (See Figure 7-31):

1. Pull unit from its installation approximately 4”.

2. Remove grille.

3. Remove aluminum tape from top corner.

4. Remove nut from bottom hinge stud (if applicable).

5. With a T-20 6-lobe bit, extract mounting screws.

6. With a small Phillips-head bit, extract screw at top

of mainframe angle and pull extrusion from unit.

Top Mainframe Extrusion, (See Figure 7-31):

1. Pull unit from its installation approximately 4”.

2. Remove grille.

3. Remove aluminum tape from corners.

4. Remove door(s) and top cabinet hinge(s).

5. With a Phillips-head bit, extract mounting screws.

6. With small Phillips-head bit, extract screws at side

of mainframe angles and pull extrusion from unit.

Figure 7-31. Mainframe Extrusion

Grille

Cabinet

Hinge

Mainframe Angle

Mainframe

7-15

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Door Shelf & Dairy Compartment Assembly

Removal and Adjustment (All Models)

Removal and adjustment of door shelves and dairy

compartment assemblies is achieved by sliding the

grooves in the end caps over the molded retaining ribs

of the door liner.

Lift up and out to remove, push in and down to install.

(See Figure 7-32)

Utility Basket (All Models)

Utility baskets ride on slides under one refrigerator com-

partment shelf.

Remove the utility basket from under the shelf assem-

bly by pulling basket out and lifting at front (See Figure

7-33). Reverse to reinstall.

Compartment Shelf Removal and Adjustment

(All Models)

Remove and adjust shelf by tilting up at front while lift-

ing the back up and out of the shelf ladders (See Figure

7-34).

To reinstall, tilt front of shelf up and align hooks at back

corners with slots in shelf ladders, then insert hooks

into slots and lower front of shelf.

Figure 7-34. Compartment Shelf

Shelf Ladders

Shelf

Figure 7-32. Door Shelf

Figure 7-33. Utility Basket

REFRIGERATOR INTERIOR COSMETIC / MECHANICAL (ALL MODELS)

7-16

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 7-35. Upper Light Diffuser

Light Diffuser

Pegs

Retainer Clip

IF BULB SHOULD SEPARATE FROM BASE, DIS-

CONNECT POWER TO UNIT BEFORE ATTEMPTING

TO REMOVE BASE.

Upper Light Diffuser (All Models)

The side frames of the light diffuser have four inverted

“T” shaped slots (two each side) which slide up over

pegs protruding from the side walls. For safety purpos-

es, retaining clips by the rear slots secure the light dif-

fuser to the rear studs.

To remove the light diffuser (See Figure 7-35):

1. Slide fingers over top of retaining clips and rotate

down.

2. With clips open, lift diffuser up and slide toward rear

of unit until center of “T” slots line up with the pegs.

3. Then lower light diffuser and remove from unit.

Figure 7-37. Humidity Drawer

Crisper Glass Shelf (All Models)

Remove crisper glass shelf assembly by opening top

drawer and lifting assembly off of crisper glass supports

(See Figure 7-36).

Large High Humidity Drawer (All Models)

Channels on each side of the large humidity drawer

assembly rest on top of the drawer carriage assembly.

To remove the high humidity drawer assembly (See

Figure 7-37):

1. Pulling drawer open until drawer stops.

2. Lift front of drawer up off of carriage assembly, then

out of unit.

Figure 7-36. Crisper Glass

7-17

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Humidity Drawer Carriage Assembly

(All Models)

Channels on each side of the carriage assembly rest on

top of the two crisper slide assemblies. At the top rear

and front sides of each channel are notches that fit over

tabs on the crisper slide assemblies. These notches

and tabs assure proper location of the carriage assem-

bly on the slides. To hold the carriage assembly firmly

in place, a small bead of silicone is applied to the top

each crisper slide assembly.

To remove the humidity drawer carriage assembly (See

Figure 7-38):

1. With a small flat-blade screwdriver, or similar tool,

wedged between front of carriage assembly and

front of crisper slide, pry carriage assembly up to

break silicone seal.

2. Lift carriage assembly up at front to disengage

notches from tabs at front of slide assemblies.

3. Pull carriage assembly forward to disengage notch-

es from tabs at rear of slide assemblies.

Small Storage Drawer

(632-2, 642-2, 661-2, 685-2, 695-2)

Small storage drawer assemblies ride on roller/slide

assemblies.

To remove a small storage drawer assembly (See

Figure 7-39):

1. Pull drawer open until it stops.

2. Lift front of drawer up.

3. Pull drawer out further to bypass stop.

4. Drop front of drawer down while lifting rear rollers

out of the roller/slide assemblies.

Figure 7-38. Carriage Assembly

Figure 7-39. Small Storage Drawer

Pry up to break silicone seal

7-18

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Control Board (All Models except 685-2, 695-2)

NOTE: Model 685-2, 695-2 control board access and

removal is covered later in this section.

The control board is held in position by two sets of tabs

behind the left side of the control panel assembly. The

two forward tabs position the LCD in the control panel

window, while the other two tabs secure the middle of

the control board. The control board is then shielded by

a control enclosure, and concealed by the light diffuser.

To remove the control board, the light diffuser must first

be removed, then (See Figures 7-40 and 7-41):

1. Extract screws securing control enclosure to ceiling

of compartment.

2. Lower back of enclosure while pulling it toward rear

of unit.

3. Disconnect all electrical leads attached to control

board.

NOTE: Observe orientation of membrane switch

ribbon cable so it can be reconnected correctly.

4. Expand the two tabs at middle of control board out-

ward while pulling back of board down slightly.

5. Expand the two forward tabs outward that hold LCD

in position

6. Pull control board down and toward rear of unit.

Figure 7-40. View of Compartment Top

Control Enclosure

Control Panel Assy

LCD

Evaporator

Fan Shroud

Evaporator Cover

Figure 7-41. Control Board

Tab Tab

Forward Tabs Ribbon

Cable

Control Board

7-19

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Control Panel Assembly / Upper Front Panel

Assembly (All Models)

NOTE: Model 685-2, 695-2 vertical control panel

access and removal is covered later in this section.

Horizontal control panel assemblies and upper front

panel assemblies are secured to the ceiling of a com-

partment by two rows of screws. The front row of

screws (which are hidden) pass through spacers and fit

into keyhole slots in the panel assembly. The back row

of screws hold the assembly in place.

To remove a control panel assembly or upper front

panel assembly, the light diffuser must be removed first,

then (See Figure 7-42):

1. (If applicable), disconnect membrane switch ribbon

cable from control board.

NOTE: Observe orientation of membrane switch

ribbon cable so it can be reconnected correctly.

2. (If applicable), disconnect control board from control

panel assembly.

3. Extract back row of screws from panel assembly.

4. Push panel assembly back to line up front row of

screws with keyhole slots.

5. Lower panel assembly down and pull out.

Water Reservoir Tank Cover (685-2, 695-2)

The water reservoir is installed by sliding it back against

retaining springs next to the shelf ladder. Two screws

then hold it in place.

To remove the water reservoir tank cover, the light dif-

fuser and upper front panel must be removed first, then

(See Figure 7-43):

1. Extract screw at bottom rear of vertical control

panel.

2. Extract screw at top center of tank cover.

3. Grasp bottom of tank cover and slide it back to

depress retaining springs.

4. Swing front edge out and pull forward.

Figure 7-42. View of Compartment Top

Back row

of screws

Control

Board

Figure 7-43. Water Reservoir Cover

Water

Reservoir

Cover

7-20

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Control Board Removal (685-2, 695-2)

The control board is held in position by two sets of tabs

behind the control panel assembly. The two forward

tabs position the LCD in the control panel window, while

the other two tabs secure the middle of the control

board. The control board is then shielded by a control

enclosure, and concealed by the water reservoir tank

cover on the mullion wall.

To remove the control board, the light diffuser, upper

front panel assembly and water reservoir tank cover

must first be removed, then (See Figure 7-44)

1. Extract screws securing control enclosure to wall.

2. Pull back of enclosure away from mullion wall and

toward rear of unit.

3. Disconnect all electrical leads from control board.

NOTE: Observe orientation of membrane switch

ribbon cable so it can be reconnected correctly.

4. Expand the two tabs at middle of control board out-

ward while pulling back of board away from wall.

5. Expand the two forward tabs outward that hold LCD

in position

6. Pull control board away from wall and toward rear

of unit.

Vertical Control Panel Assembly (685-2, 695-2)

Vertical control panel assemblies are secured to the

mullion wall by screws and a sheet metal retainer.

NOTE: It is recommended, but not necessary, to dis-

connect control board from control panel assembly

before remove control panel assembly.

To remove a vertical control panel assembly, the light

diffuser, upper front panel and water reservoir tank

cover must be removed first, then (See Figure 7-45):

1. Disconnect membrane switch ribbon cable from

control board.

NOTE: Observe orientation of membrane switch

ribbon cable so it can be reconnected correctly.

2. Disconnect control board from control panel.

3. Extract screws at back of control panel assembly.

4. Pull panel assembly forward, from sheet metal

retainer.

Figure 7-44. Control Board

Tab

Forward

Tabs

Ribbon

Cable

Control

Board

Tab

Figure 7-45. Vertical Control Panel

Screws

Control

Panel

Retainer

7-21

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Water Reservoir Tank (685-2, 695-2)

The water reservoir is concealed behind the water

reservoir tank cover, and is held to the mullion wall with

screws fitting into spacers..

NOTE: Before removing the water reservoir tank, turn

the water supply to the unit off and drain the water from

the tank.

To remove the water reservoir tank, the light diffuser,

upper front panel and water reservoir tank cover must

be removed first, then (See Figure 7-46):

1. Disconnect compression fittings at inlet and outlet

of water reservoir tank.

2. Remove mounting screws and lift out.

NOTE: After reinstalling a water reservoir tank, the

WATER button at the door dispenser must be

depressed for approximately two minutes to refill the

tank.

Refrigerator Evaporator Cover (All Models)

The bottom of an evaporator cover is secured by slots

in the side flanges fitting over pegs at the bottom of

each shelf ladder. At the top, screws hold the evapora-

tor cover to the evaporator fan shroud. On models 685-

2 and 695-2, there is also a screw just below the water

reservoir tank cover.

To remove an evaporator cover, the light diffuser must

be removed first, then (See Figure 7-47):

1. Extract screws at top of evaporator cover.

NOTE: On models 685-2 and 695-2, also extract

the screw just below the water reservoir tank cover.

2. Tilt evaporator cover forward and lift off of pegs.

Figure 7-46. Water Reservoir Tank

Compression

fitting

Compression

fitting

Screw

Water Tank

Figure 7-47. Evaporator Cover

Evaporator Cover

7-22

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Evaporator Fan Shroud Assembly (All Models)

Evaporator fan shroud assemblies are secured to the

ceiling of the compartment with screws.

To remove an evaporator fan shroud assembly, the light

diffuser and evaporator cover must be removed first,

then (See Figure 7-48):

1. Extract mounting screws.

2. Lower assembly and disconnect lighting wire har-

ness.

Refrigerator Evaporator Fan Assembly

(All Models)

Evaporator fan assemblies are secured to the ceiling of

the compartment with screws.

To remove an evaporator fan assembly, the light dif-

fuser, evaporator cover and fan shroud must be

removed first, then (See Figure 7-49):

1. Disconnect fan electrical leads.

2. Extract mounting screws and pull assembly from

unit.

Refrigerator Accent Light (15 Watt Light Strip)

(601RG-2, 611G-2, 650G-2)

Refrigerator accent lights (a.k.a. light strips) are held in

place with a light bracket at one end and grommets that

fit into the light box at the other end. The light bracket

and light box are secured to the ceiling with screws.

To remove a light strip, the light diffuser, evaporator

cover and fan shroud must be removed first, then (See

Figure 7-50):

1. Extract screws which secure light box to ceiling.

2. Disconnect light strip electrical leads.

3. Pull grommet and light strip from light box.

4. Pull light strip from light bracket.

Figure 7-48. Fan Shroud

Figure 7-49. Evaporator Fan Assembly

Lighting wire harness

Screws (4)

Electrical

leads

Figure 7-50. Accent Lights

Light Box

Light Strips

Grommets

7-23

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Refrigerator Compartment Thermistor (All Models)

The refrigerator compartment thermistor is located

behind the evaporator cover, and attached to the wall

with a screw just above the evaporator.

To remove a compartment thermistor, the light diffuser

and evaporator cover must be removed first, then (See

Figure 7-51):

1. Disconnect thermistor electrical leads.

NOTE: On newer models the thermistor is hard-

wired to the control board, so it will be necessary to

cut the thermistor wires to remove it.

2. Extract mounting screws an pull thermistor from

unit.

Refrigerator Evaporator Thermistor (All Models)

The refrigerator evaporator thermistor is inserted into

the third opening in the evaporator fins from the top,

approximately to the center of the evaporator.

To remove the refrigerator evaporator thermistor, the

light diffuser and evaporator cover must be removed

first, then (See Figure 7-52):

1. Disconnect thermistor electrical leads.

NOTE: On newer models the thermistor is hard-

wired to the control board, so it will be necessary to

cut the thermistor wires to remove it.

2. Pull thermistor from evaporator fins.

Figure 7-52. Evaporator Thermistor

Evaporator Thermistor

Figure 7-51. Refrigerator Compartment Thermistor

Compartment

Thermistor

7-24

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Door Shelf Assembly Removal / Adjustment

(601F-2)

Removal and adjustment of door shelf assemblies is

achieved by sliding the grooves in the end caps over

the molded retaining ribs of the door liner.

Lift up and out to remove, push in and down to install

(See Figure 7-53).

Freezer Compartment Shelf Removal / Adjustment

(601F-2)

Remove and adjust shelf by tilting up at front while lift-

ing the back up and out of the shelf ladders (See Figure

7-54).

To reinstall, tilt front of shelf up and align hooks at back

corners with slots in shelf ladders, then insert hooks

into slots and lower front of shelf.

Upper Light Diffuser (601F-2)

The side frames of the light diffuser have four inverted

“T” shaped slots (two each side) which slide up over

pegs protruding from the side walls. For safety purpos-

es, retaining clips by the rear slots secure the light dif-

fuser to the rear studs.

To remove the light diffuser (See Figure 7-55):

1. Slide fingers over retaining clips and rotate down.

2. With clips open, lift diffuser up and slide toward rear

of unit until center of “T” slots line up with the pegs.

3. Then lower light diffuser and remove from unit.

Figure 7-53. Door Shelf

Figure 7-55. Upper Light Diffuser

Light Diffuser

Pegs

Retainer Clip

IF BULB SHOULD SEPARATE FROM BASE, DIS-

CONNECT POWER TO UNIT BEFORE ATTEMPTING

TO REMOVE BASE.

Figure 7-54. Compartment Shelf

Shelf Ladders

Shelf

FREEZER INTERIOR COSMETIC / MECHANICAL (MODEL 601F-2)

7-25

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Ice Bucket (601F-2)

Lift ice bucket up out of freezer basket (not shown).

Freezer Basket Assembly

(601F-2)

To remove freezer basket assembly (See Figure 7-56):

1. Pull basket open until it stops.

2. Lift up at front and pull out.

Freezer Glass Shelf (601F-2)

The glass shelf is secured to the side walls by screws

that pass through the side frames.

To remove the freezer glass shelf (See Figure 7-57):

1. From underneath glass shelf, remove the two front

mounting screws

2. Loosen the two rear screws.

NOTE: The rear screws fit into slots, so they do

not need to be fully removed.

3. Pull shelf forward slightly and lift up and out.

NOTE: When reinstalling freezer glass shelf, make sure

flange at top of freezer basket center slide support sets

into the channel in freezer glass shelf front.

Icemaker Assembly (601F-2)

The icemaker assembly is located behind the top right

freezer basket, just below the glass shelf. It is attached

to the drain trough enclosure with two screws at top

and one at bottom.

To remove the icemaker assembly, the top right freezer

basket must first be removed, then (See Figures 7-58):

1. Disconnect ice level mechanism by sliding connect-

ing rod to right, off of icemaker shut-off arm, allow-

ing ice level arm to drop out of the way.

2. Extract screw at bottom left of icemaker.

3. Extract screws at top of icemaker.

4. Pull forward and disconnect electrical leads.

Figure 7-58. Icemaker

Connecting rod

Icemaker

Figure 7-56. Freezer Basket

Figure 7-57. Freezer Glass Shelf

Rear slots

Flange

7-26

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Drain Trough Enclosure (601F-2)

The drain trough enclosure is secured to the back wall

of the compartment with screws and plastic supports,

just below the freezer glass shelf.

NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the freezer glass

shelf, icemaker or compartment thermistor in order to

remove the drain trough enclosure.

To remove drain trough enclosure (See Figure 7-59):

1. Extract screws at top corners of enclosure.

2. Extract screws along bottom of enclosure.

3. Lean enclosure forward, disconnect thermistor, ice-

maker and icemaker switch electrical leads, then

pull enclosure out.

Freezer Compartment Thermistor (601F-2)

The freezer compartment thermistor is attached to the

bottom center of the drain trough enclosure, just above

the top center freezer basket slide. The thermistor wire

leads attach to the wire harness behind the drain trough

enclosure.

To remove the compartment thermistor, the drain trough

enclosure must be disconnected from the back wall

first, then (See Figure 7-60):

1. Disconnect thermistor from wire harness.

NOTE: On newer models the thermistor is hard-

wired to the control board, so it will be necessary to

cut the thermistor wires to remove it.

2. Extract thermistor mounting screw.

Icemaker Fill Tube Heater (601F-2)

The icemaker fill tube and fill tube heater are located at

top right of icemaker, just below freezer glass shelf and

above the drain trough enclosure. The icemaker fill

tube heater plugs into the wire harness behind the drain

trough enclosure.

To remove the fill tube heater, the drain trough enclo-

sure must be disconnected from the back wall first, then

(See Figure 7-61):

1. Disconnect fill tube heater from wire harness.

2. Slide fill tube heater off of fill tube.

Figure 7-59. Drain Trough Enclosure

Figure 7-61. Fill Tube Hearer

Figure 7-60. Compartment Thermistor

Drain Trough

Enclosure

Fill Tube Heater

Compartment

Thermistor

7-27

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 7-63. View of Compartment Top

Control Enclosure

Control Panel Assy

LCD

Evaporator

Fan Shroud

Evaporator Cover

Figure 7-64. Control Board

Tab Tab

Forward Tabs Ribbon

Cable

Control Board

Freezer Drain Tube Heater (601F-2)

The braided wire drain tube heater is connected to the

wire harness behind the drain trough enclosure.

To remove the heater, drain trough enclosure must be

disconnected from back wall, then (See Figure 7-62):

1. Disconnect heater from wire harness

2. Extract clamp which holds heater in place, and pull

drain tube heater from drain tube.

NOTE: When replacing the drain tube heater, it is nec-

essary to insert it a minimum of 3" into the drain tube.

Drain Trough Heater (601F-2)

The drain trough heater consists of a braided wire

heater sandwiched between two strips of aluminum foil,

one of which has adhesive on the outside to hold the

heater to the bottom of the drain trough.

To remove the heater, drain trough enclosure must be

disconnected from back wall, then (See Figure 7-62):

1. Disconnect heater from wire harness

2. Peel heater from bottom of drain trough.

NOTE: When replacing the drain trough heater, bottom

of drain trough must be dry in order for heater to stick.

Control Board (601F-2)

The control board is held in position by two sets of tabs

behind the left side of the control panel assembly. The

two forward tabs position the LCD in the control panel

window, while the other two tabs secure the middle of

the control board. The control board is then shielded by

a control enclosure, and concealed by the light diffuser.

To remove the control board, the light diffuser must first

be removed, then (See Figures 7-63 and 7-64):

1. Extract screws securing control enclosure to ceiling

of compartment.

2. Lower back of enclosure while pulling it toward rear

of unit.

3. Disconnect all electrical leads from control board.

NOTE: Observe orientation of membrane switch

ribbon cable so it can be reconnected correctly.

4. Expand the two tabs at middle of control board out-

ward while pulling back of board down slightly.

5. Expand the two tabs outward that hold LCD.

6. Pull control board down and toward rear of unit.

Figure 7-62. Drain Trough and Drain tube Heaters

Drain Tube Heater

Drain Trough Heater

7-28

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Control Panel Assembly (601F-2)

The control panel assembly is secured to the ceiling of

the compartment by two rows of screws. The front row

of screws (which are hidden) pass through spacers and

fit into keyhole slots in the panel assembly. The back

row of screws hold the assembly in place.

To remove a control panel assembly, the light diffuser

must be removed first, then (See Figure 7-65):

1. Disconnect membrane switch ribbon cable from

control board.

NOTE: Observe orientation of membrane switch

ribbon cable so it can be reconnected correctly.

2. Detach control board from control panel assembly.

3. Extract back row of screws from panel assembly.

4. Push panel assembly back to line up front row of

screws with keyhole slots.

5. Lower panel assembly down and pull out.

Freezer Evaporator Fan Shroud Assembly (601F-2)

The Evaporator fan shroud assembly is secured to the

ceiling of the compartment with screws.

To remove the evaporator fan shroud assembly, the

light diffuser, freezer glass shelf and evaporator cover

must be removed first, then (See Figure 7-66):

1. Extract mounting screws.

2. Lower assembly and disconnect lighting wire har-

ness.

Freezer Evaporator Fan Assembly (601F-2)

Evaporator fan assemblies are secured to the ceiling of

the compartment with screws.

To remove an evaporator fan assembly, the light dif-

fuser, freezer glass shelf, evaporator cover and fan

shroud must be removed first, then (See Figure 7-67):

1. Disconnect fan electrical leads.

2. Extract mounting screws and pull assembly from

unit.

Figure 7-65. View of Compartment Top

Back row

of screws

Control

Board

Figure 7-66. Fan Shroud

Figure 7-67. Evaporator Fan Assembly

Lighting wire harness

Screws (4)

Electrical

leads

7-29

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Freezer Evaporator Thermistor (601F-2)

The freezer evaporator thermistor is attached to the left

evaporator bracket.

To remove the freezer evaporator thermistor, the light

diffuser, freezer glass shelf and evaporator cover must

be removed first, then (See Figure 7-68):

1. Disconnect thermistor electrical leads.

NOTE: On newer models the thermistor is hard-

wired to the control board, so it will be necessary to

cut the thermistor wires to remove it.

2. Extract mounting screws an pull thermistor from

unit.

Defrost Terminator (601F-2)

The defrost terminator is attached to the top center

pass of the evaporator.

To remove the defrost terminator, the light diffuser,

freezer glass shelf and evaporator cover must be

removed first, then (See Figure 7-69):

1. Disconnect terminator electrical leads.

2. Pull terminator off of evaporator.

Evaporator Defrost Heater (601F-2)

The defrost heater is inserted into channels in the fins

of the evaporator. C-shaped heater clips are hooked

from one evaporator tube to another, over the heater, to

hold it in place.

To remove the defrost heater, the light diffuser, freezer

glass shelf and evaporator cover must be removed first,

then (See Figure 7-70):

1. Disconnect heater electrical leads.

2. With a needle-nose pliers, or similar tool, detach

heater clips by pulling tab of clips away from evapo-

rator.

3. Gently pull defrost heater from fins of evaporator.

Figure 7-68. Freezer Evaporator Thermistor

Evaporator

Thermistor

Figure 7-69. Defrost Terminator

Defrost

Terminator

Figure 7-70. Defrost Heater

Defrost Heater

Heater Clip

7-30

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Ice Bucket (611-2, 611G-2, 650-2, 650G-2)

Remove ice bucket by lifting out of left rear corner of

upper freezer basket (not shown).

Freezer Light Bulb (611-2, 611G-2, 650-2, 650G-2)

There is no light diffuser in the freezer of these models.

The light bulbs are located in front of evaporator cover.

Turn bulb counterclockwise to remove, clockwise to

install (See Figure 7-71).

IF BULB SHOULD SEPARATE FROM BASE, DIS-

CONNECT POWER TO UNIT BEFORE ATTEMPTING

TO REMOVE BASE. Figure 7-71. Freezer Light Bulbs

Light Bulbs

FREEZER INTERIOR COSMETIC / MECHANICAL (MODELS 611-2, 611G-2, 650-2, 650G-2)

Freezer Upper Basket Assembly

(611-2/611G-2,650-2/650G-2 Start w/Serial #2354455)

NOTE: To remove the upper freezer basket prior to

serial #2354455, see Freezer Drawer Assembly

removal instructions in the Exterior Cosmetic /

Mechanical section, as the upper basket is part of the

drawer assembly.

To remove upper basket assembly (See Figure 7-72):

1. Pull upper basket fully forward.

2. Lift front of basket up slightly, then push upper bas-

ket slides back to disengage slide hooks from the

slots at rear of basket assembly.

3. Continue pulling basket forward while lifting it up off

of the slides.

Freezer Lower Basket Assembly

(611-2/611G-2,650-2/650G-2 Start w/Serial #2354455)

NOTE: To remove the lower freezer basket prior to

serial #2354455, see Freezer Drawer Assembly

removal instructions in the Exterior Cosmetic /

Mechanical section, as the lower basket is part of the

drawer assembly.

To remove a lower basket assembly, start with the

freezer drawer fully open, and upper basket fully in, or

removed. Then, lift the lower freezer basket up, off of

the basket retainers, and out of the freezer compart-

ment. (See Figure 7-73)

Figure 7-72. Freezer Upper Basket Assembly

Figure 7-73. Freezer Lower Basket Assembly

Starting w/Serial

#2354455

Starting w/Serial

#2354455

7-31

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 7-75. Upper Basket Full Extension Slide

Figure 7-76. Freezer Drawer Slide Rail

Figure 7-77. Full Extension Drawer Slide Assy.

Upper Basket Slide

Drawer Slide

Drawer Slide Rail

Freezer Cabinet Slide Assembly

(611-2/611G-2,650-2/650G-2 Prior to Serial #2354455)

The freezer cabinet slides are attached to the side wall

with screws.

To remove a cabinet slide assembly, extract the mount-

ing screws and pull it from the side wall (See Figure 7-

74).

Upper Freezer Basket Full Extension Slide

(611-2/611G-2,650-2/650G-2 Start w/Serial #2354455)

The upper freezer basket full extension slides are

attached to the side walls of the freezer with screws.

To remove an upper freezer basket full extension slide,

first remove the drawer front assembly and both freezer

baskets, then extract the slide mounting screws and pull

the slide from the side wall. (See Figure 7-75)

Freezer Drawer Slide Rail Assembly

(611-2/611G-2,650-2/650G-2 Start w/Serial #2354455)

The drawer slide rail assemblies are attached to the full

extension drawer slides with screws.

To remove a drawer slide rail assembly, first remove the

drawer front assembly and the lower freezer basket,

then (See Figure 7-76):

1. Extend slide rail out fully.

2. Extract slide rail mounting screws, then lift slide rail

from the slide.

Freezer Full Extension Drawer Slide Assembly

(611-2/611G-2,650-2/650G-2 Start w/Serial #2354455)

The full extension drawer slide assemblies are attached

to the side walls with screws.

To remove a full extension drawer slide assembly, first

remove the drawer front assembly, lower freezer basket

and drawer slide rail assembly, then (See Figure 7-77):

1. Extend drawer slide until front access hole lines up

with front mounting screw.

2. Extract slide mounting screws, then pull slide from

the side wall.

Figure 7-74. Freezer Cabinet Slide

Prior to Serial

#2354455

Freezer Cabinet Slide

Starting w/Serial

#2354455

Starting w/Serial

#2354455

Starting w/Serial

#2354455

7-32

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 7-80. Fan and Light Switch

Lower Switch Enclosure

Fan Switch

Light Switch

Figure 7-78. Icemaker

Icemaker

Icemaker Assembly (611-2, 611G-2, 650-2, 650G-2)

The icemaker assembly is attached to the left hand wall

of the freezer compartment with screws.

To remove the icemaker assembly (See Figures 7-78):

1. Extract screw at bottom left of icemaker.

2. Extract screws at top of icemaker.

3. Pull icemaker forward, disconnect electrical leads.

Freezer Light, Fan and Icemaker Switches

(611-2/611G-2,650-2/650G-2 Prior to Serial #2354455)

The freezer light, fan and icemaker switches are locat-

ed inside the switch enclosure at the top left rear corner

of the freezer compartment.

To remove a switch, the icemaker assembly should first

be removed, then (See Figures 7-79):

1. Extract screws securing switch enclosure to top left

rear corner of freezer compartment.

2. Lower enclosure, disconnect wire leads from switch

being removed.

3. Depress tabs on sides of switch and push switch

out of enclosure.

Freezer Compartment Thermistor

(611-2/611G-2,650-2/650G-2 Prior to Serial #2354455)

The freezer compartment thermistor is located inside

the switch enclosure at the top left of the compartment.

To remove it (See Figures 7-79):

1. Extract switch enclosure mounting screws.

2. Lower enclosure, then disconnect thermistor wire

leads from wire harness.

NOTE: On newer models the thermistor is hard-

wired to the control board, so it will be necessary to

cut the thermistor wires to remove it.

3. Extract screw which secures thermistor to inside of

enclosure.

Freezer Fan and/or Light Switch

(611-2/611G-2,650-2/650G-2 Start w/Serial #2354455)

The fan and light switches are in the lower switch

enclosure, which is attached to the left side wall.

To remove a fan or light switch, first remove the drawer

front assembly and the lower freezer basket, then (See

Figure 7-80):

1. Extract switch box mounting screws.

2. Flip switch box over and disconnect electrical leads.

3. Depress the tabs at back side of switch and push

switch from hole in switch box.

Starting w/Serial

#2354455

Figure 7-79. Switches & Compartment Thermistor

Thermistor

Icemaker Switch

Fan Switch

Light Switch

Prior to Serial

#2354455

7-33

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 7-81. Drawer Closer

Drawer Closer

Starting w/Serial

#2354455

Freezer Drawer Closer Assembly

(611-2/611G-2,650-2/650G-2 Start w/Serial #2354455)

The drawer closer assembly is attached to the left side

wall with screws.

To access and remove a drawer closer assembly, first

remove the drawer front assembly and the lower freez-

er basket. Then, extract the screws that secure the

drawer closer to the side wall. (See Figure 7-81)

Freezer Ice Bucket (Icemaker) Switch

(611-2/611G-2,650-2/650G-2 Start w/Serial #2354455)

The ice bucket switch is in the upper switch enclosure,

which is attached to the side wall with screws.

To remove the ice bucket switch, first remove the draw-

er front assembly, lower and upper freezer baskets, and

the icemaker, then (See Figure 7-82):

1. Extract switch box mounting screws.

2. Flip the switch box over and disconnect switch elec-

trical leads.

3. Depress the tabs at back side of switch and push

switch from hole in switch box.

Freezer Compartment Thermistor

(611-2/611G-2,650-2/650G-2 Start w/Serial #2354455)

The freezer compartment thermistor is located inside

the upper switch enclosure.

To remove the compartment thermistor, first remove the

drawer front assembly, lower and upper freezer bas-

kets, and the icemaker, then (See Figure 7-82):

1. Extract screws securing switch enclosure to wall.

2. Lower enclosure, then disconnect thermistor wire

leads from wire harness.

NOTE: On newer models the thermistor is hard-

wired to the control board, so it will be necessary to

cut the thermistor wires to remove it.

3. Extract screw which secures thermistor to inside of

enclosure.

Figure 7-82. Ice Bucket Switch and

Compartment Thermistor

Ice Bucket

Switch

Compartment Thermistor

(Inside Enclosure)

Starting w/Serial

#2354455

7-34

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 7-84. Evaporator Cover

Figure 7-85. Evaporator Fan

Evaporator Cover

Cut silicone seal at right.

Evaporator

Fan Assembly

Freezer Air Duct (611-2, 611G-2, 650-2, 650G-2)

The freezer air duct is located at the top rear of the

freezer compartment, directly behind evaporator cover.

To remove the air duct (See Figures 7-83):

1. Extract screws at front flange of duct.

2. Pull front flange of duct down and forward.

NOTE: When reinstalling freezer air duct, rear flange of

air duct must sit on top of the two lower white pegs in

rear wall.

Freezer Evaporator Cover

(611-2, 611G-2, 650-2, 650G-2)

The freezer evaporator cover is located at the top of the

freezer compartment, and the right side is sealed to the

right wall with silicone.

To remove the freezer evaporator cover, the freezer air

duct must be removed first, then (See Figures 7-84):

1. With a knife, cut silicone seal at right side of evapo-

rator cover.

2. Extract screws from evaporator cover back & front.

3. Pull left side of evaporator cover down and discon-

nect electrical leads to lights.

4. Continue pulling cover down and to the left.

NOTE: When replacing evaporator cover it is important

to reseal right side with silicone. Failure to do so could

cause an icing situation in freezer compartment.

Freezer Evaporator Fan Assembly

(611-2, 611G-2, 650-2, 650G-2)

The evaporator fan is attached to the fan shroud with a

bracket and screws. This assembly is located behind

the evaporator cover, and above the freezer air duct.

To remove the evaporator fan assembly, the freezer air

duct and freezer evaporator cover must be removed

first, then (See Figures 7-85):

1. Extract screws at left side of fan shroud.

2. Tilt front edge of shroud down and disconnect fan

motor wiring from wire harness.

3. Pull assembly forward and out.

NOTE: The freezer evaporator fan can now be

removed from fan shroud.

NOTE: When reinstalling freezer evaporator fan assem-

bly, the oblong holes in rear flange of fan shroud must

be placed over the two upper white pegs in rear wall.

Figure 7-83. Air Duct

Air Duct

7-35

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Freezer Evaporator Thermistor

(611-2, 611G-2, 650-2, 650G-2)

The freezer evaporator thermistor is attached with a

screw to the left evaporator bracket.

To remove the evaporator thermistor, the freezer air

duct, evaporator cover and evaporator fan assembly

must be removed first, then (See Figures 7-86):

1. Disconnect thermistor wire leads from wire harness.

NOTE: On newer models the thermistor is hard-

wired to the control board, so it will be necessary to

cut the thermistor wires to remove it.

2. Extract screw which secures thermistor to left evap-

orator bracket.

Defrost Terminator (611-2, 611G-2, 650-2, 650G-2)

The defrost terminator is attached to the evaporator out-

let, after the accumulator.

To remove the defrost terminator, the freezer air duct,

freezer evaporator cover and evaporator fan assembly

must be removed first, then (See Figures 7-87):

1. Disconnect terminator wire leads from wire harness.

2. Pull terminator off of tubing.

Defrost Heater (611-2, 611G-2, 650-2, 650G-2)

The defrost heater is inserted into channels in the fins

of the evaporator. C-shaped heater clips are hooked

from one evaporator tube to another, over the heater, to

hold it in place.

To remove the defrost heater, the freezer air duct, freez-

er evaporator cover and evaporator fan assembly must

be removed first, then (See Figures 7-88):

1. Disconnect heater wire leads from wire harness.

2. With pliers, or similar tool, detach heater clips by

pulling tab of clips away from evaporator.

3. Gently pull heater down and to the left, out of evap-

orator fins.

NOTE: A heater strap is wrapped around the defrost

heater, then inserted into the drain cup. This strap con-

ducts heat into the drain cup during defrost. This strap

must be reinstalled when replacing the defrost heater.

Figure 7-86. Evaporator Thermistor

Figure 7-87. Defrost Terminator

Figure 7-88. Defrost Heater

Evaporator

Thermistor

Heater Strap

Defrost Heater

Defrost

Terminator

7-36

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

FREEZER INTERIOR COSMETIC / MECHANICAL (MODELS 632-2, 642-2, 661-2)

Freezer Door Shelf Assembly Removal and

Adjustment (632-2, 642-2, 661-2)

Removal and adjustment of door shelf assemblies is

achieved by sliding the grooves in the end caps over

the molded retaining ribs of the door liner.

Lift up and out to remove, push in and down to install

(See Figure 7-89).

Freezer Compartment Shelf Removal and

Adjustment (632-2, 642-2, 661-2)

Remove and adjust shelf by tilting up at front while lift-

ing the back up and out of the shelf ladders (See Figure

7-90).

To reinstall, tilt front of shelf up and align hooks at back

corners with slots in shelf ladders, then insert hooks

into slots and lower front of shelf.

Upper Light Diffuser (632-2, 642-2, 661-2)

Side frames of light diffusers have inverted “T” shaped

slots (two each side) which fit up over pegs protruding

from side walls. For safety purposes, retainer clips by

the rear slots secure the light diffuser to the rear studs.

To remove the light diffuser (See Figure 7-91):

1. Slide fingers over retaining clips and rotate down.

2. With clips open, lift diffuser up and slide toward rear

of unit until center of “T” slots line up with the pegs.

3. Then lower light diffuser and remove from unit.

Figure 7-89. Door Shelf

Figure 7-91. Upper Light Diffuser

Light Diffuser

Pegs

Retainer Clip

IF BULB SHOULD SEPARATE FROM BASE, DIS-

CONNECT POWER TO UNIT BEFORE ATTEMPTING

TO REMOVE BASE.

Figure 7-90. Compartment Shelf

Shelf Ladders

Shelf

7-37

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 7-94. Ice Bucket Assembly

Pull

out.

Lift

up.

Freezer Upper Front Panel Assembly

(632-2, 642-2, 661-2)

The upper front panel assembly is secured to the ceil-

ing of a compartment by two rows of screws. The front

row of screws (which are hidden) pass through spacers

and fit into keyhole slots in the panel assembly. The

back row of screws hold the assembly in place.

To remove a upper front panel assembly, the light dif-

fuser must be removed first, then (See Figure 7-92):

1. Extract back row of screws from panel assembly.

2. Push panel assembly back to line up front row of

screws with keyhole slots.

3. Lower panel assembly down and pull out.

Freezer Basket Assembly (632-2, 642-2, 661-2)

To remove freezer basket assembly (See Figure 7-93):

1. Pull basket open until it stops.

2. Lift up at front and pull out.

Ice Bucket Assembly (632-2, 642-2, 661-2)

A flange at the back of the ice bucket assembly hooks

over the top edge of the ice bucket carriage assembly.

To remove the ice bucket assembly (See Figure 7-94):

1. Pull ice bucket open until it stops.

2. Lift up and pull forward.

NOTE: To reinstall ice bucket, pull ice bucket carriage

assembly all the way forward before attempting to hook

flange at back of ice bucket over top edge of carriage

assembly.

Figure 7-93. Freezer Basket

Figure 7-92. View of Compartment Top

Back row

of screws

Upper

Front

Panel

7-38

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 7-96. Ice Bucket Carriage Assy

Icemaker Assembly (632-2, 642-2, 661-2)

The icemaker assembly attached to the evaporator

cover with two screws at top and one at bottom.

To remove the icemaker assembly, remove the freezer

shelves and ice bucket first. Push the ice bucket car-

riage assembly back in, then (See Figures 7-95):

1. Extract screws from evaporator shelf front.

2. Pull freezer duct/shelf forward slightly to allow

greater access to icemaker assembly.

3. Disconnect ice level mechanism by sliding connect-

ing rod to right, off of shut-off arm, allowing ice level

arm to drop out of the way.

4. Extract screws from bottom left & top of icemaker.

5. Lift icemaker up slightly to clear ice level arm, then

pull forward and disconnect electrical leads.

Ice Bucket Carriage Assembly (632-2, 642-2, 661-2)

The ice bucket carriage assembly rollers are captivated

by the ice bucket slides attached to each side wall.

To remove the ice bucket carriage assembly, remove

the ice bucket first and push the ice bucket carriage

assembly back in, then (See Figures 7-96:

1. Extract the two front most screws from each ice

bucket slide.

NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the screws

that fit into slots at the bottom rear of each slide.

2. Pull slides and carriage assembly forward and out.

Compartment Thermistor (632-2, 642-2, 661-2)

The freezer compartment thermistor is attached to the

left side wall with a screw, in the icemaker area.

To remove the thermistor, remove the ice bucket and

icemaker first, then (See Figures 7-97):

1. Disconnect thermistor electrical leads.

NOTE: On newer models the thermistor is hard-

wired to the control board, so it will be necessary to

cut the thermistor wires to remove it.

2. Extract mounting screws an pull thermistor from

unit.

Figure 7-97. Compartment Thermistor

Figure 7-95. Icemaker

Connecting rod

Icemaker

Duct/Shelf

Carriage Assembly

Ice

Bucket

Slide (2)

Compartment Thermistor

7-39

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Freezer Lower Light Diffuser (632-2, 642-2, 661-2)

The lower light diffuser is a flexible plastic material and

is held in place with diffuser retainers at top and bottom.

To remove the lower light diffuser, remove the top freez-

er basket first, then (See Figures 7-98):

1. Push top of diffuser down, causing it to flex and

release from top retainer.

2. Pull diffuser forward.

Freezer Duct/Shelf Assembly (632-2, 642-2, 661-2)

The freezer duct/shelf assembly is secured at the top

by slots in the side flanges fitting over pegs at the top of

each shelf ladder. Screws at the shelf front hold the

duct/shelf to supports in the side walls.

To remove the freezer duct/shelf assembly, remove the

freezer light diffuser, freezer shelves and ice bucket

first, then (See Figures 7-99):

1. Pull grounding clip terminal from top flange of

duct/shelf and pull duct/shelf out.

2. Extract screws from evaporator shelf front.

3. Pull freezer duct/shelf forward and down.

NOTE: When reinstalling freezer duct/shelf, be sure to

reattach grounding clip terminal to top flange.

Fill Tube Heater (632-2, 642-2, 661-2)

To remove the fill tube heater, remove the freezer

shelves, ice bucket and duct/shelf assembly first, then

(See Figures 7-100):

1. Disconnect heater wire leads from wire harness.

2. Slide heater off of fill tube.

Figure 7-99. Duct/Shelf

Figure 7-98. Lower Light Diffuser

Figure 7-100. Fill Tube Heater

Light Diffuser

Duct/Shelf

Grounding

clip

Fill Tube

Heater

7-40

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Defrost Terminator (632-2, 642-2, 661-2)

The defrost terminator is clipped onto the evaporator

outlet, after the accumulator.

To remove the defrost terminator, remove the freezer

shelves, ice bucket and duct/shelf assembly first, then

(See Figures 7-101):

1. Disconnect terminator wire leads from wire harness.

2. Pull terminator off of tubing.

Freezer Evaporator Fan Assembly

(632-2, 642-2, 661-2)

Two screws at the top of the evaporator fan shroud

secure the evaporator fan assembly to the evaporator

brackets at the back of the evaporator.

To remove the evaporator fan assembly, remove the

freezer shelves, ice bucket and duct/shelf assembly

first, then (See Figures 7-102):

1. Disconnect evaporator fan wire leads from wire har-

ness.

2. Extract retaining screws at top of evaporator fan

shroud.

3. Pull fan assembly up, slightly forward, and out.

Freezer Evaporator Cover (632-2, 642-2, 661-2)

A grounding screw secures the evaporator cover to a

bracket at the front of the evaporator. The evaporator

cover also bends back underneath the evaporator to act

as the drain trough.

To remove the evaporator cover, remove the freezer

shelves, ice bucket and duct/shelf assembly first, then

(See Figures 7-103):

1. Extract ground screw at front of evaporator cover.

2. Lean evaporator cover forward to gain access to

drain tube heater, then pull drain tube heater from

drain tube.

3. Pull evaporator cover forward while pulling drain

tube off of drain spout.

Figure 7-102. Evaporator Fan

Figure 7-101. Defrost Terminator

Figure 7-103. Evaporator Cover

Defrost Terminator

Evaporator Fan Assembly

Screws

(2)

Evaporator

Cover

Drain

Tube

Heater

7-41

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Defrost Heater (632-2, 642-2, 661-2)

The defrost heater is inserted into channels in the evap-

orator fins. C-shaped heater clips hook from one evap-

orator tube to another, over heater, to hold it in place.

To remove the defrost heater, remove the freezer

shelves, ice bucket, duct/shelf assembly and evaporator

cover first, then (See Figures 7-104):

1. Disconnect heater wire leads from wire harness.

2. With needle-nose pliers, or similar tool, detach

heater clips by pulling clips away from evaporator.

3. Gently pull defrost heater from fins of evaporator.

Freezer Drain Tube Heater (632-2, 642-2, 661-2)

The drain tube heater runs down the right side of the

evaporator. A clamp at the bottom right of the evapora-

tor holds the heater in place. It is then routed to the

drain tube at bottom center rear of evaporator cover.

To remove the drain tube heater, remove the freezer

shelves, ice bucket, duct/shelf assembly and evaporator

cover first, then (See Figures 7-105):

1. Disconnect heater wire leads from wire harness.

2. Extract screws which secure evaporator to rear wall

of freezer compartment.

3. Rotate evaporator to left to gain access to clamp

holding heater at bottom right rear of evaporator.

4. Extract screw holding clamp and pull heater out.

Freezer Evaporator Thermistor (632-2, 642-2, 661-2)

The freezer evaporator thermistor is attached at the top

of the left evaporator bracket with a screw.

To remove the evaporator thermistor, remove the freez-

er shelves, ice bucket, duct/shelf assembly and evapo-

rator cover first, then (See Figures 7-106):

1. Disconnect thermistor electrical leads.

NOTE: On newer models the thermistor is hard-

wired to the control board, so it will be necessary to

cut the thermistor wires to remove it.

2. Extract screws which secure evaporator to rear wall

of freezer compartment.

3. Pull bottom of evaporator up while rotating to the

right to gain access to thermistor mounting screw.

4. Extract screw securing thermistor.

Figure 7-104. Defrost Heater

Figure 7-105. Drain Tube Heater

Figure 7-106. Evaporator Thermistor

Defrost Heater

Heater

Clip

Drain Tube Heater Clamp & Screw

Thermistor

7-42

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 7-109. Juice Can Rack

Lift

up.

Pull

out.

FREEZER INTERIOR COSMETIC / MECHANICAL (MODELS 685-2 - prior to serial #2271174, 695-2 - prior to

serial #2269189)

NOTE: Also see “FREEZER INTERIOR COSMETIC / MECHANICAL (MODELS 685-2 - starting with serial

#2271174, 695-2 - starting with serial #2269189), later in this section.

Freezer Door Shelf Assembly Removal / Adjustment

(685-2, 695-2)

Removal and adjustment of door shelf assemblies is

achieved by sliding the grooves in the end caps over

the molded retaining ribs of the door liner.

Lift up and out to remove, push in and down to install

(See Figure 7-107).

Freezer Compartment Shelf Removal / Adjustment

(685-2, 695-2)

Remove and adjust shelf by tilting up at front while lift-

ing the back up and out of the shelf ladders (See Figure

7-108).

To reinstall, tilt front of shelf up and align hooks at back

corners with slots in shelf ladders, then insert hooks

into slots and lower front of shelf.

Juice Can Rack Assembly (685-2, 695-2)

Hooks at the back of the juice can rack assembly fit into

slots in the evaporator front cover.

To remove juice can rack assembly (See Figure 7-109):

1. Lift rack up.

2. Pull rack forward.

Figure 7-107. Door Shelf

Figure 7-108. Compartment Shelf

Shelf Ladders

Shelf

7-43

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Ice Bucket Assembly (685-2, 695-2)

The ice bucket has a flange at the top of each side that

rides on the slides that are part of the ice bucket main-

frame assembly. When the ice bucket is installed prop-

erly, the coupler at the back engages the motor drive

yoke to turn the auger and impeller.

To remove the ice bucket assembly, the juice can rack

must be removed first, then (See Figure 7-110):

1. Lift front of ice bucket up slightly.

2. Pull ice bucket forward and out.

NOTE: To insure the juice can rack will fit after the ice

bucket is installed, the coupler at the back of the ice

bucket must engage the motor drive yoke properly.

Freezer Upper Front Panel Assembly (685-2, 695-2)

The upper front panel assembly is secured to the ceil-

ing of a compartment by two rows of screws. The front

row (which is hidden) passes through spacers and fit

into keyhole slots in the panel assembly. The back row

of screws hold the assembly in place.

To remove a upper front panel (See Figure 7-111):

1. Extract back row of screws from panel assembly.

2. Push panel assembly back to line up front row of

screws with keyhole slots.

3. Lower panel assembly down and pull out.

Ice Auger Motor Assembly (685-2, 695-2)

The ice auger motor assembly consists of the ice auger

motor and two icemaker switches. It is attached to the

rear wall with screws, directly behind the ice bucket

assembly.

To remove the ice auger motor assembly, the juice can

rack and ice bucket must first be removed, then (See

Figure 7-112):

1. Extract screws securing ice auger motor assembly

to rear wall.

2. Disconnect auger motor and icemaker switches

electrical leads, then pull assembly out.

Lift up.

Pull out.

Figure 7-110. Ice Bucket Assembly

Figure 7-111. Upper Front Panel

Upper Front

Panel

Extract

Screws (4)

Figure 7-112. Ice Auger Motor

Auger

Motor

Assy

7-44

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

IF BULB SHOULD SEPARATE FROM BASE, DIS-

CONNECT POWER TO UNIT BEFORE ATTEMPTING

TO REMOVE BASE.

Figure 7-114. Light Diffuser

Diffuser Glass

Freezer Evaporator Front Cover Assembly

(685-2, 695-2)

The freezer evaporator front cover assembly is held in

place by two screws at top, and two screws through the

bottom flange into the lower evaporator cover assembly.

To remove the evaporator front cover assembly, the

juice can rack must first be removed, then (See Figure

7-113):

1. Extract screws from bottom flange.

2. Extract screws from top flange.

3. Lower evaporator front cover down and disconnect

lighting electrical leads.

Freezer Lower Light Diffuser Glass (685-2, 695-2)

The light Diffuser slides into grooves in the lower evap-

orator cover assembly.

To remove the light Diffuser, the freezer evaporator front

cover assembly must be removed first, then slide the

glass forward (See Figure 7-114).

NOTE: There is no upper light diffuser in the freezer.

The light bulbs are located directly behind the upper

front panel (See Figure 7-111).

Figure 7-113. Evaporator Front/Light Assembly

Extract

Screws (4)

Evap Front/ Light Assy

Figure 7-115. Evaporator Thermistor

Evaporator

Thermistor

Freezer Evaporator Thermistor (685-2, 695-2)

The freezer evaporator thermistor is attached to the

front evaporator bracket with a screw.

To remove the freezer evaporator thermistor, the juice

can rack and evaporator front cover/light assembly will

need to be removed first, then (See Figure 7-115):

1. Disconnect thermistor electrical leads.

NOTE: On newer models the thermistor is hard-

wired to the control board, so it will be necessary to

cut the thermistor wires to remove it.

2. Extract screw securing thermistor to evaporator

bracket.

7-45

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Freezer Evaporator Fan Assembly (685-2, 695-2)

The rear flange of the freezer evaporator fan assembly

fits into a slot in the rear evaporator bracket. The front

is secured by screws through the front flange into the

front evaporator bracket.

To remove freezer evaporator fan assembly, the juice

can rack, upper front panel and evaporator front cover

will first need to be removed, then (See Figure 7-116):

1. Extract the screws which secure fan bracket to front

evaporator bracket.

2. Pull assembly out of slot at rear evaporator bracket

and disconnect fan motor electrical leads.

Freezer Rear Duct (685-2, 695-2)

The bottom of the freezer rear duct is secured by slots

in the side flanges fitting over pegs at the bottom of

each shelf ladder. At the top, screws hold the rear duct

to the lower evaporator cover assembly.

To remove the air duct (See Figure 7-117):

1. Extract mounting screws at top front flange.

2. Pull top forward and lift up off of pegs.

Lower Evaporator Cover Assembly (685-2, 695-2)

The lower evaporator cover assembly has pegs at the

back that fit into pockets in rear wall. Snap pins toward

front sides slide into pockets in the side walls.

To remove the lower evaporator cover assembly, the

evaporator front cover/light assembly and rear duct

must first be removed, then (See Figure 7-118):

1. Pull snap pins out of pockets in side walls.

2. Disconnect lighting electrical leads.

3. Pull assembly forward.

Figure 7-118. Lower Evaporator Cover

Pull snap pins from pockets

Figure 7-117. Rear Duct

Extract screws

Figure 7-116. Compartment Thermistor

Evaporator

Fan Assy

7-46

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 7-120. Ice Bucket Carriage Assembly

Extract screws

Freezer Compartment Thermistor (685-2, 695-2)

The freezer compartment thermistor is attached to the

mullion wall by the icemaker, with a screw.

To remove the freezer compartment thermistor, the juice

can rack and ice bucket must be removed first, then

(See Figure 7-119):

1. Disconnect thermistor electrical leads.

NOTE: On newer models the thermistor is hard-

wired to the control board, so it will be necessary to

cut the thermistor wires to remove it.

2. Extract screw securing thermistor to wall.

Ice Bucket Carriage Assembly (685-2, 695-2)

The ice bucket carriage assembly is secured by screws,

to the right side wall and rear wall.

To remove the carriage assembly, the evaporator front

cover/light assembly, rear duct and lower evaporator

cover must first be removed, then (See Figure 7-120):

1. Extract mounting screws from rear wall.

2. Extract mounting screws from mullion wall.

3. Pull ice bucket mainframe assembly down slightly

and disconnect icemaker electrical leads.

Icemaker (685-2, 695-2)

The icemaker is attached to the ice bucket carriage

assembly with screws.

To remove the icemaker, the ice bucket carriage

assembly will need to be removed from the freezer sec-

tion first, then (Not Pictured):

1. Extract mounting screw which secure icemaker to

carriage assembly.

2. Lift icemaker assembly off of carriage assembly.

Icemaker Fill Tube Heater (685-2, 695-2)

To remove the icemaker fill tube heater, the juice can

rack, evaporator front cover/light assembly, rear duct,

lower evaporator cover and ice bucket carriage assem-

bly will need to be removed first, then (See Figure 7-

121):

1. Disconnect heater electrical leads.

2. Extract retaining screw and clamp (if present).

3. Pull heater and aluminum fill tube extension out as

one.

Icemaker

Figure 7-121. Icemaker Fill Tube and Heater

Fill Tube &

Heater

Figure 7-119. Compartment Thermistor

compartment

thermistor

7-47

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Freezer Drain Tube Heater (685-2, 695-2)

To access and remove the drain tube heater, the juice

can rack, upper front panel, evaporator front cover, rear

duct, lower evaporator cover assembly and ice bucket

carriage assembly will need to be removed first, then

(See Figure 7-122).

1. Extract screws at the right side of the drain pan.

2. Lower front of drain pan down and pull drain tube

heater from drain tube.

NOTE: When replacing the drain tube heater, it is nec-

essary to insert it a minimum of 3" into the drain tube.

Evaporator Defrost Heater (685-2, 695-2)

To access and remove the defrost heater, the juice can

rack, upper front panel, evaporator front cover, rear

duct, lower evaporator cover assembly and ice bucket

carriage assembly will need to be removed first, then

(See Figure 7-123).

1. disconnect heater electrical leads.

2. Remove heater clips which secure heater to evapo-

rator by pulling tab of clip down and out.

3. Gently pull defrost heater from fins of evaporator.

Figure 7-123. Defrost Heater

Defrost

Heater

Figure 7-122. Drain Tube Heater

Drain Tube Heater

7-48

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 7-126 . Juice Can Rack

Lift

up.

Pull

out.

FREEZER INTERIOR COSMETIC / MECHANICAL (MODELS 685-2 - starting with serial #2271174, 695-2 -

starting with serial #2269189)

NOTE: Also see “FREEZER INTERIOR COSMETIC / MECHANICAL (MODELS 685-2 - prior to serial

#2271174, 695-2 - prior to serial #2269189), earlier this section.

Freezer Door Shelf Assembly Removal / Adjustment

(685-2, 695-2)

Removal and adjustment of door shelf assemblies is

achieved by sliding the grooves in the end caps over

the molded retaining ribs of the door liner.

Lift up and out to remove, push in and down to install

(See Figure 7-124).

Freezer Compartment Shelf Removal / Adjustment

(685-2, 695-2)

Remove and adjust shelf by tilting up at front while lift-

ing the back up and out of the shelf ladders (See Figure

7-125).

To reinstall, tilt front of shelf up and align hooks at back

corners with slots in shelf ladders, then insert hooks

into slots and lower front of shelf.

Juice Can Rack Assembly (685-2, 695-2)

Hooks at the back of the juice can rack assembly fit into

slots in the evaporator front cover.

To remove juice can rack assembly (See Figure 7-126):

1. Lift rack up.

2. Pull rack forward.

Figure 7-124. Door Shelf

Figure 7-125. Compartment Shelf

Shelf Ladders

Shelf

7-49

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Ice Bucket Assembly (685-2, 695-2)

The ice bucket has a flange at the top of each side that

rides on the slides that are part of the ice bucket main-

frame assembly. When the ice bucket is installed prop-

erly, the coupler at the back engages the motor drive

yoke to turn the auger and impeller.

To remove the ice bucket assembly, the juice can rack

must be removed first, then (See Figure 7-127):

1. Lift front of ice bucket up slightly.

2. Pull ice bucket forward and out.

NOTE: To insure the juice can rack will fit after the ice

bucket is installed, the coupler at the back of the ice

bucket must engage the motor drive yoke properly.

Freezer Lower Light Diffuser Glass (685-2, 695-2)

Press the tab to the right of the diffuser glass, then slide

the glass to the right (See Figure 7-128).

NOTE: There is no upper light diffuser in the freezer.

The light bulbs are located directly behind the upper

front panel (See Figure 7-129).

Lift up.

Pull out.

Figure 7-127. Ice Bucket Assembly

IF BULB SHOULD SEPARATE FROM BASE, DIS-

CONNECT POWER TO UNIT BEFORE ATTEMPTING

TO REMOVE BASE.

Freezer Upper Front Panel Assembly

(685-2, 695-2)

The upper front panel assembly is secured to the ceil-

ing of a compartment by two rows of screws. The front

row (which is hidden) passes through spacers and fit

into keyhole slots in the panel assembly. The back row

of screws hold the assembly in place.

To remove a upper front panel (See Figure 7-129):

1. Extract back row of screws from panel assembly.

2. Push panel assembly back to line up front row of

screws with keyhole slots.

3. Lower panel assembly down and pull out.

Figure 7-128. Light Diffuser

Figure 7-129. Upper Front Panel

Upper Front

Panel

Press tab & slide

glass right

7-50

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Ice Auger Motor Assembly (685-2, 695-2)

The ice auger motor assembly consists of the ice auger

motor and two icemaker switches. It is attached to the

rear wall with screws, directly behind the ice bucket

assembly.

To remove the ice auger motor assembly, the juice can

rack and ice bucket must first be removed, then (See

Figure 7-130):

1. Extract screws securing ice auger motor assembly

to rear wall.

2. Disconnect auger motor and icemaker switches

electrical leads, then pull assembly out.

Freezer Evaporator Front Cover/Light Assy

(685-2, 695-2)

The freezer evaporator front cover/light assembly is

held in place by two screws at top, and two screws

through the bottom flange into the lower evaporator

cover/light assembly.

To remove the evaporator front/light assembly, the juice

can rack must first be removed, then (See Figure 7-

131):

1. Extract screws from bottom flange.

2. Extract screws from top flange.

3. Lower evaporator front cover down and disconnect

lighting electrical leads.

Freezer Compartment Thermistor (695-2 only)

NOTE: The model 685-2 freezer compartment thermis-

tor is located behind the evaporator front cover, just

inside the air duct. See “Freezer Compartment

Thermistor (685-2)” later in this section.

The 695-2 freezer compartment thermistor is located on

the mullion wall by the icemaker.

To remove the compartment thermistor, the juice can

rack, ice bucket and freezer evaporator front cover/light

assembly must be removed first, then (See Figure 7-

132):

1. Disconnect thermistor electrical leads.

NOTE: On newer models the thermistor is hard-

wired to the control board, so it will be necessary to

cut the thermistor wires to remove it.

2. Extract screw securing thermistor to wall.

Extract

Screws (4)

Figure 7-130. Ice Auger Motor

Auger

Motor

Assy

Figure 7-132. 695-2 Compartment Thermistor

Figure 7-131. Evaporator Front/Light Assembly

Extract

Screws (4)

Evap

Front/

Light

Assy

695-2

Freezer

compartment

thermistor

7-51

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Freezer Lower Evaporator Cover/Light Assembly

(685-2, 695-2)

The lower evaporator cover/light assembly has two

holes at the rear which fit over pegs in the rear wall.

Screws toward the front sides of the cover secure the

assembly to the side walls.

To remove the lower evaporator cover/light assembly,

the evaporator front cover/light assembly must first be

removed, then (See Figure 7-133):

1. Extract screws toward front sides of assembly.

2. Disconnect lighting electrical leads.

3. Pull assembly forward.

Ice Bucket Mainframe Assembly (685-2, 695-2)

The ice bucket mainframe assembly is secured to the

mullion wall and the rear wall with screws.

To remove the ice bucket mainframe assembly, the

juice can rack and evaporator front cover/light assembly

will need to be removed first, then (See Figure 7-134):

1. Extract mounting screws from rear wall.

2. Extract mounting screws from mullion wall.

3. Pull ice bucket mainframe assembly down slightly

and disconnect icemaker electrical leads.

Icemaker (685-2, 695-2)

The icemaker is attached to the ice bucket mainframe

assembly with screws.

To remove the icemaker, the ice bucket mainframe

assembly will need to be removed from the freezer sec-

tion first, then (See Figure 7-135):

1. Extract mounting screw which secure icemaker to

ice bucket mainframe assembly.

2. Lift icemaker assembly off of ice bucket mainframe

assembly.

Figure 7-133. Lower Evap Cover/Light Assy

Lower Evap

Cover / Light Assy

Figure 7-135. Icemaker

Figure 7-134. Ice Bucket Mainframe Assembly

Icemaker &

Mainframe

Assembly

Icemaker

7-52

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Figure 7-136. Icemaker Fill Tube and Heater

Figure 7-138. Terminator / Bimetal

Figure 7-137. Fan Cover

Icemaker Fill Tube Heater (685-2, 695-2)

To remove the icemaker fill tube heater, the juice can

rack, evaporator front cover/light assembly, and ice

bucket mainframe assembly will need to be removed

first, then (See Figure 7-136):

1. Disconnect heater electrical leads.

2. Extract retaining screw and clamp (if present).

3. Pull heater and aluminum fill tube extension out as

one.

Freezer Fan Cover Assembly (685-2, 695-2)

The freezer fan cover is held in place at the top by clips

that are pat of the evaporator fan assembly. At the bot-

tom left of the fan cover, a screw secures it to the evap-

orator cover assembly.

To remove the freezer fan cover assembly, the juice can

rack, evaporator front cover/light assembly, and lower

evaporator cover/light assembly will need to be

removed first, then (See Figure 7-137):

1. Extract the screw from the bottom left corner.

2. Slide assembly down, out of clips.

Evaporator Cover Assembly (685-2, 695-2)

The evaporator cover assembly is held to the back and

left side wall with screws, and the drain pan support is

held to the evaporator cover assembly with screws

passing into screw grommets.

To remove the evaporator cover assembly (along with

the drain pan support), the juice can rack, evaporator

front cover/light assembly, lower evaporator cover/light

assembly and freezer fan cover need to be removed

first, then (See Figure 7-138):

1. Extract the screws from the back and left side walls.

2. Pull assembly forward.

Fill Tube

Heater

Screw

Fan

Cover

Evap

Cover

Drain

Pan

Support

Clip

7-53

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Freezer Compartment Thermistor (685-2 only)

NOTE: The model 695-2 freezer compartment thermis-

tor is attached to the mullion wall. See “Freezer

Compartment Thermistor (695-2)” earlier in this section.

The 685-2 freezer compartment thermistor is behind the

evaporator cover assembly, inside the air duct.

To remove the compartment thermistor, the juice can

rack, evaporator front cover/light assembly, lower evap-

orator cover/light assembly, freezer fan cover, and

evaporator cover assembly must be removed first, then

(See Figure 7-139):

1. Disconnect thermistor electrical leads.

NOTE: On newer models the thermistor is hard-

wired to the control board, so it will be necessary to

cut the thermistor wires to remove it.

2. Pull thermistor up out of duct.

Freezer Evaporator Thermistor (685-2, 695-2)

The freezer evaporator thermistor is attached to the

front evaporator bracket with a screw.

To remove the freezer evaporator thermistor, the juice

can rack, evaporator front cover/light assembly, lower

evaporator cover/light assembly, freezer fan cover, and

evaporator cover assembly will need to be removed

first, then (See Figure 7-140):

1. Disconnect thermistor electrical leads.

NOTE: On newer models the thermistor is hard-

wired to the control board, so it will be necessary to

cut the thermistor wires to remove it.

2. Extract screw securing thermistor to evaporator

bracket.

Defrost Terminator & Fan Delay Bimetal

(685-2, 695-2)

The defrost terminator and fan delay bimetal are

attached to the evaporator outlet.

To remove the defrost terminator and fan delay bimetal,

the juice can rack, evaporator front cover/light assem-

bly, lower evaporator cover/light assembly, freezer fan

cover, and evaporator cover assembly will need to be

removed first, then (See Figure 7-141):

1. Disconnect terminator, or bimetal electrical leads.

2. Pull terminator, or bimetal off of tubing.

Figure 7-139. 685-2 Compartment Thermistor

Figure 7-141. Terminator & Fan Delay Bimetal

Figure 7-140. Evaporator Thermistor

685-2 Freezer

Compartment Thermistor

(inside duct)

Evaporator

Thermistor

Defrost

Terminator &

Fan Delay

Bimetal

7-54

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Evaporator Defrost Heater (685-2, 695-2)

The defrost heater sits under the evaporator, fitting into

a slot at bottom of the evaporator back bracket, with a

heater clip holding the other end of the heater.

To remove the defrost heater, the juice can rack, evapo-

rator front cover/light assembly, lower evaporator

cover/light assembly, freezer fan cover, and evaporator

cover assembly will need to be removed first, then (See

Figure 7-142):

1. Disconnect heater wire leads from wire harness.

2. Pull defrost heater toward front of unit.

Freezer Evaporator Fan Assembly (685-2, 695-2)

Holes in the back flange of the freezer evaporator fan

assembly fit over pegs in the back wall. A screw

through the front flange holds the assembly to the left

wall.

To remove the evaporator fan assembly, the juice can

rack, evaporator front cover/light assembly, lower evap-

orator cover/light assembly, freezer fan cover, and

evaporator cover assembly will need to be removed

first, then (See Figure 7-143):

1. Extract the screws from the back and left side walls.

2. Pull assembly forward.

Freezer Drain Pan and Drain Tube Heat Conductor

(685-2, 695-2)

The drain tube heat conductor is riveted to the bottom

of the evaporator back bracket, and protrudes into the

drain pan spout. The support, attached to the evapora-

tor cover assembly, holds the drain pan front in place.

To remove the drain pan, the juice can rack, evaporator

front cover/light assembly, lower evaporator cover/light

assembly, freezer fan cover, evaporator cover assembly

and evaporator fan assembly will need to be removed

first, then (See Figure 7-144):

1. Extract screws securing evaporator to wall.

2. Pull evaporator assembly forward and up, until

drain tube heat conductor clears drain pan spout.

3. Pull drain pan forward.

Figure 7-142. Defrost Heater

Figure 7-144. Terminator & Fan Delay Bimetal

Figure 7-143. Evaporator Fan Assembly

Defrost

Heater

Evaporator

Fan Assy

Drain

Pan

Heat Conductor

7-55

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

LOWER COMPRESSOR AREA MECHANICAL (MODELS 601R-2, 601RG-2, 601F-2)

Water Valve (601F-2)

NOTE: Models 611-2, 611G-2, 632-2, 642-2, 650-2,

650G-2, 661-2 water valve removal instructions are

covered in “EXTERIOR COSMETIC / MECHANICAL

(ALL MODELS EXCEPT 601’S)” earlier in this section.

NOTE: Models 685-2 and 695-2 water valve removal

instructions are covered under “UPPER COMPRES-

SOR AREA MECHANICAL (ALL MODELS EXCEPT

601’S)” later in this section.

The water valve is mounted to a bracket in the com-

pressor area.

To remove a water valve, first remove the lower grille

section, then (See Figure 7-145):

1. Loosen mounting screw which holds water valve to

bracket.

2. Lift valve until screw head aligns with large section

of key-hole slot.

3. Push valve back until screw head clears bracket,

then lower valve and pull forward.

4. Disconnect electrical leads from valve.

5. Disconnect water lines from valve.

Condenser Fan (601R-2, 601RG-2, 601F-2)

The condenser fan is mounted to the condenser fan

shroud with three fan mounting brackets that are

hooked into grommeted holes in the fan shroud.

Screws passing through these brackets secure the fan

motor to the brackets. The condenser fan blade is held

onto the fan motor shaft with a nut.

To remove the condenser fan, first remove the grille,

then (See Figure 7-146):

1. Extract screws securing motor to brackets.

NOTE: Brackets will unhook from grommeted

holes in condenser fan shroud after screws are

removed.

2. To remove fan blade from fan motor:

a. Grab blade and motor while turning nut coun-

terclockwise.

b. Then pull the blade from the motor shaft.

Figure 7-145. Water Valve

Figure 7-146. Condense Fan

Condenser Fan Shroud

Fan Blade

Nut

Silencer

Motor

Bracket (3)

Screws (3)

Key-hole Slot

Bracket

Water Valve

7-56

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Condenser Fan (All Models except 601’s)

The condenser fan is mounted to the condenser fan

shroud with three fan mounting brackets that are

hooked into grommeted holes in the fan shroud.

Screws passing through these brackets secure the fan

motor to the brackets. The condenser fan blade is held

onto the fan motor shaft with a nut.

To remove the condenser fan, first remove the grille,

then (See Figure 7-147):

1. Extract screws securing motor to brackets.

NOTE: Brackets will unhook from grommeted

holes in condenser fan shroud after screws are

removed.

2. To remove fan blade from fan motor:

a. Grab blade and motor while turning nut coun-

terclockwise.

b. Then pull the blade from the motor shaft.

Dual Water Valve

(685-2 Prior to Serial #2271174)

(695-2 Prior to Serial #2269189)

NOTE: The water valve on these models is at top of

the unit. The water line inlet connection is under the

unit.

To remove the dual water valve, first remove the grille,

then (See Figure 7-148):

1. Disconnect wire leads from both solenoids.

2. Slide spray cover off of inlet compression fitting.

3. Disconnect inlet water line from dual water valve.

4. Disconnect outlet water lines.

5. Extract screw which holds valve to bracket and lift

valve up and out.

UPPER COMPRESSOR AREA MECHANICAL (ALL MODELS EXCEPT 601’S)

Figure 7-147. Condense Fan

Condenser Fan Shroud

Fan Blade

Nut

Silencer

Motor

Bracket (3)

Screws (3)

Figure 7-148. Dual Water Valve

Spray Cover

Inlet

Water

Line

Screw

Bracket

Dual Water

Valve

Wire Leads

Outlet

Water

Line

7-57

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Filter-Drier (601R-2, 601RG-2, 601F-2)

The filter-drier is attached to the condenser outlet and

secured to the condenser with a cable tie.

After capturing the refrigerant from sealed system, (See

Figure 7-149):

1. Cut cable tie.

2. With a file, score a line around capillary tube 1” or

less from drier outlet, then fatigue capillary tube at

this line until it separates.

3. With a tube-cutter, cut inlet tube 1” or less from

drier inlet.

NOTE: It is not recommended to sweat tubing apart.

Doing so will induce moisture into the sealed system.

NOTE: After capillary tube separates, check tubing for

internal burrs. If burrs exist, repeat step 2 above.

NOTE: When installing replacement filter-drier, insert

capillary tube until it touches screen inside drier, then

pull capillary tube away from screen approximately 3/8"

(9.5 mm) before brazing (See Figure 7-150).

NOTE: Filter-drier outlet must be facing downward in

order to function properly.

Compressor (601R-2, 601RG-2, 601F-2)

The Compressor is secured to the unit tray by bolts into

grommets.

NOTE: When replacing a compressor, the filter-drier

must also be replaced.

After capturing the refrigerant from sealed system, (See

Figure 7-151):

1. Remove compressor electrical cover and discon-

nect electricals from compressor.

2. Extract bolts from grommets at each corner of com-

pressor base.

3. Pull compressor forward and rotate to the right to

gain access to suction and discharge lines.

4. Using a tube cutter, cut suction and discharge lines

approximately 1” from compressor.

NOTE: It is not recommended to sweat tubing apart.

Doing so will induce moisture into the sealed system.

SEALED SYSTEM (MODELS 601R-2, 601RG-2, 601F-2)

Figure 7-149. Filter-Drier

Filter-Drier

Cut here

Figure 7-150. Filter-Drier Cut-Away View

3/8”

(9.5 mm)

Figure 7-151. Compressor Top View

Compressor

(Actual porting

may vary)

Electricals

BoltsBolts

Cut here

7-58

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Drain Pan Condensate Heater Loop

(601R-2, 601RG-2)

The drain pan condensate heater loop is located in the

compressor area, and sits in the drain pan.

NOTE: When replacing a condensate heater loop, the

filter-drier must also be replaced.

NOTE: It is recommended that a suction line drier be

added to the sealed system when replacing the con-

densate heater loop.

After capturing the refrigerant from sealed system, (See

Figure 7-152):

1. Extract bolts from grommets at each corner of com-

pressor base.

2. Pull compressor forward and rotate to gain access

to condensate heater tubing.

3. Using a tube cutter, cut condensate loop inlet and

outlet.

NOTE: It is not recommended to sweat tubing apart.

Doing so will induce moisture into the sealed system.

Condenser (601R-2, 601RG-2, 601F-2)

NOTE: When replacing the condenser, the filter-drier

must also be replaced.

After capturing the refrigerant from sealed system, (See

Figure 7-153):

1. Extract screws which hold condenser fan shroud to

condenser.

2. Using a tube cutter, cut condenser inlet and outlet.

NOTE: It is not recommended to sweat tubing

apart. Doing so will induce moisture into the sealed

system.

3. Extract condenser mounting screws which hold

condenser side brackets to unit tray.

4. Slide condenser to the right, then pull forward.

Figure 7-152. Drain Pan Condensate Heater Loop

Heater

Loop

Compressor

Figure 7-153. Condenser

Cut

Condenser

7-59

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Evaporator (601R-2, 601RG-2, 601F-2)

The evaporator is attached to the rear wall with screws,

behind the evaporator cover.

NOTE: When replacing an evaporator, the filter-drier

must also be replaced.

NOTE: When removing a 601F-2 evaporator, the evap-

orator thermistor, defrost terminator and defrost heater

must also be removed and reused on new evaporator.

After capturing the refrigerant from the sealed system

(See Figure 7-154):

1. Extract screws which hold evaporator to rear wall.

2. Pull bottom of evaporator up and rotate heat

exchanger out.

3. With a file, score a line around capillary tube, 1” or

less from evaporator inlet, then fatigue capillary

tube at this line until it separates.

4. With a tube-cutter, cut evaporator outlet 1” or less

from accumulator (if applicable), or 1” or less from

suction line connection point.

NOTE: It is not recommended to sweat tubing apart.

Doing so will induce moisture into the sealed system.

NOTE: After capillary tube is fatigue until it separates,

check tubing for internal burrs. If burrs exist, repeat

step 3 above.

Figure 7-154. Evaporator

Cut Here

7-60

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Heat Exchanger (601R-2, 601RG-2, 601F-2)

NOTE: When replacing a heat exchanger, the filter-

drier must also be replaced.

NOTE: It is not necessary to pull the unit from its

installation in order to replace a heat exchanger. The

heat exchanger travels through tubing channel which is

foamed into the rear wall of the unit.

After capturing the refrigerant from the sealed system

(See Figures 7-155, 7-156 and 7-157):

1. Extract screws which hold evaporator to rear wall.

2. Pull bottom of evaporator up and rotate heat

exchanger out.

3. With a file, score a line around capillary tube, 1” or

less from evaporator inlet, then fatigue capillary

tube at this line until it separates.

4. With a tube-cutter, cut evaporator outlet 1” or less

from accumulator (if applicable), or 1” or less from

suction line connection point.

5. With a tin snips, or similar tool, cut heat exchanger

in compartment as close to tubing channel as pos-

sible.

6. In lower compressor area, use a tube-cutter to cut

drier from condenser.

7. Extract bolts from grommets at each corner of com-

pressor base.

8. Pull compressor forward and rotate to gain access

to suction line.

9. Using a tube cutter, cut suction line approximately

1” from compressor.

10. Pull remaining heat exchanger from tubing channel.

NOTE: It is not recommended to sweat tubing apart.

Doing so will induce moisture into the sealed system.

NOTE: When replacing the heat exchanger, it is rec-

ommended to attach it at the evaporator end first, then

feed heat exchanger down through the tubing channel.

NOTE: After heat exchanger is installed, the tubing

channel must be sealed closed with silicone.

Figure 7-155. Heat Exchanger

Cut Here

Figure 7-156. Filter-Drier

Filter-Drier

Cut here

Figure 7-157 Compressor Top View

Compressor

(Actual porting

may vary) BoltsBolts

Cut here

7-61

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

SEALED SYSTEM (ALL MODELS EXCEPT 601’S)

Filter-Drier (All Models except 601’s)

The filter-drier is attached to to a drier bracket in the

compressor area by a cable tie.

After capturing the refrigerant from sealed system, (See

Figure 7-158):

1. Cut Cable tie.

2. With a file, score a line around capillary tube 1” or

less from drier inlet, then fatigue capillary tube at

this line until it separates.

3. With a tube-cutter, cut inlet tube 1” or less from

drier inlet.

NOTE: It is not recommended to sweat tubing apart.

Doing so will induce moisture into the sealed system.

NOTE: After capillary tube separates, check tubing for

internal burrs. If burrs exist, repeat step 2 above.

NOTE: When installing replacement filter-drier, insert

capillary tube until it touches screen inside drier, then

pull capillary tube away from screen approximately 3/8"

before brazing. (See Figure 7-159).

NOTE: Filter-drier outlet must be facing downward in

order to function properly.

Compressor (All Models except 601’s)

Compressors are secured to the top of the unit with

nuts over stud-bolts. The left compressor is for the

freezer, the right is the refrigerator compressor.

NOTE: When replacing a compressor, the filter-drier

must also be replaced.

After capturing the refrigerant from sealed system, (See

Figure 7-160):

1. Remove compressor electrical cover and discon-

nect electricals from compressor.

2. Extract nuts from stud-bolts at each corner of com-

pressor base.

3. Lift compressor up and pull forward to gain access

to suction and discharge lines.

4. Using a tube cutter, cut suction and discharge lines

approximately 1” from compressor.

NOTE: It is not recommended to sweat tubing apart.

Doing so will induce moisture into the sealed system.

Figure 7-158. Filter-Drier

Filter-Drier

Cut here

Figure 7-159. Filter-Drier Cut-Away View

3/8”

(9.5 mm)

Figure 7-160. Compressor Top View

Compressor

(Actual porting

may vary)

Electricals

BoltsBolts

Cut here

7-62

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Condenser (All Models except 601’s)

NOTE: When replacing the condenser, both filter-driers

must also be replaced.

NOTE: It is necessary to pull the unit from its installa-

tion and remove the unit shroud in order to replace a

condenser.

After capturing the refrigerant from sealed system, (See

Figure 7-161):

1. Extract screws which hold condenser fan shroud to

condenser.

2. Using a tube cutter, cut condenser inlet and outlet.

NOTE: It is not recommended to sweat tubing

apart. Doing so will induce moisture into the sealed

system.

3. Extract condenser mounting screws which hold

condenser side brackets to top of unit.

4. Lift condenser off of unit

Evaporator (All Models except 601’s)

Evaporators are attached to rear walls, or ceilings with

screws, behind evaporator covers.

NOTE: When replacing an evaporator, the filter-drier

must also be replaced.

NOTE: When removing a freezer evaporator, the evap-

orator thermistor, defrost terminator and defrost heater

must also be removed and reused on new evaporator.

After capturing the refrigerant from the sealed system

(See Figure 7-162):

1. Extract screws which hold evaporator to rear wall or

ceiling of compartment.

2. Pull and rotate evaporator so heat exchanger is

accessible.

3. With a file, score a line around capillary tube, 1” or

less from evaporator inlet, then fatigue capillary

tube at this line until it separates.

4. With a tube-cutter, cut evaporator outlet 1” or less

from accumulator (if applicable), or 1” or less from

suction line connection point.

NOTE: It is not recommended to sweat tubing apart.

Doing so will induce moisture into the sealed system.

NOTE: After capillary tube is fatigue until it separates,

check tubing for internal burrs. If burrs exist, repeat

step 3 above..

Figure 7-161. Condenser

Cut

Condenser

Figure 7-162. Refrigerator Evaporator

NOTE: Freezer evaporator removal not illustrated.

Cut

7-63

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Component Access / Removal

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Heat Exchanger (All Models except 601’s)

NOTE: When replacing a heat exchanger, the filter-

drier must also be replaced.

NOTE: It is necessary to pull a model 611-2, 611G-2,

650-2 and 650G-2 from its its installation in order to

replace a freezer heat exchanger. For all other models,

it is not necessary to the unit from its installation in

order to replace a freezer heat exchanger.

After capturing the refrigerant from the sealed system

(See Figures 7-163, 7-164, 7-165):

1. Extract screws which hold evaporator.

2. Pull and rotate evaporator so heat exchanger is

accessible.

3. With a file, score a line around capillary tube, 1” or

less from evaporator inlet, then fatigue capillary

tube at this line until it separates.

4. With a tube-cutter, cut evaporator outlet 1” or less

from accumulator (if applicable), or 1” or less from

suction line connection point.

5. With a tin snips, or similar tool, cut heat exchanger

in compartment as close as possible to wall or ceil-

ing where heat exchanger passes through.

6. In upper compressor area, use a tube-cutter to cut

drier from condenser.

7. Extract nuts from stud-bolts at each corner of com-

pressor base.

8. Lift compressor up and pull forward to gain access

to suction line.

8. Using a tube cutter, cut suction line approximately

1” from compressor.

9. Pull remaining heat exchanger from unit.

NOTE: It is not recommended to sweat tubing apart.

Doing so will induce moisture into the sealed system.

NOTE: When replacing the heat exchanger, it is recom-

mended to attach it at the evaporator end first, then

feed the heat exchanger through hole, up to compres-

sor area.

Figure 7-163. Heat Exchanger

Cut Here

Figure 7-164. Filter-Drier

Figure 7-165. Compressor Top View

Compressor

(Actual porting

may vary) BoltsBolts

Cut here

Filter-Drier

Cut here

7-64

Component Access / Removal Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Troubleshooting Guides

8-1 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

SECTION 8

TROUBLESHOOTING

GUIDES

Troubleshooting Guides Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

8-2

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDES

This section of the manual contains:

• The Error Code Table and the Error Code Troubleshooting Guide.

• The General Troubleshooting Guide, which covers all problems that a 700-3 Series Base unit may experience.

• The Sealed System Diagnostic Tables.

• The Membrane Switch/Ribbon Cable Test Procedures, used to determine if a control panel assembly is defective.

HOW TO USE ERROR CODE TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Error Codes indicate problems registered by specific components. If error codes are registered, they will appear

before temperature readings while in Diagnostic Mode.

NOTE: If Error Codes appear with a flashing “SERVICE” indicator prior to initiating Diagnostic Mode, the unit expe-

rienced temperature problems that may or may not be associated with the Error Codes displayed.

To initiate Diagnostic Mode, press and hold either COLDER key, then press the UNIT ON/OFF key, then release

both keys. Now, check to see if Error Codes are displayed, being sure to toggle through all error and temperature

readings by pressing either COLDER key or either WARMER key. (See Error Code Table Below)

If Error Codes appear during Diagnostic Mode, follow the Error Code Troubleshooting Guide on the following pages.

The left column lists the error codes. The right column explains what tests to perform and/or what action to take to

correct the error.

NOTE: If error codes are observed in diagnostic mode, a non-flashing SERVICE indicator will appear on the LCD

when Diagnostic Mode ends, indicating error codes are stored. Error Codes must be manually cleared from the

electronic control memory. To clear the non-flashing SERVICE indicator and the error codes, the problem must be

corrected and the unit must be ON. Then, press and hold the Door Ajar Alarm Bell ON/OFF key for 15 seconds.

The control will emit a short “beep” when the SERVICE indicator and error codes are cleared.

Error Code Table

CODE INDICATION

05 Refrig. Cabinet Thermistor read open or shorted for 10+ seconds, or repeatedly read erratic temp’s

06 Refrig. Evaporator Thermistor read open or shorted for 10+ seconds, or repeatedly read erratic temp’s

07 Freezer Cabinet Thermistor read open or shorted for 10+ seconds, or repeatedly read erratic temp’s

08 Freezer Evaporator Thermistor read open or shorted for 10+ seconds, or repeatedly read erratic temp’s

20 Defrost Under-heat with No Voltage Feedback Through Gray/White Wire at Defrost Start

21 Defrost Overheat

22 No Voltage Feedback Through Gray/White Wire at Defrost Start

23 Defrost Overheat with No Voltage Feedback through Gray/White Wire at Defrost Start

24 Defrost Under-heat

30 Excessive Icemaker Water Valve Solenoid Activation (Exceeded 15 Seconds, 5 Times)

40 Excessive Freezer Compressor Run

50 Excessive Refrigerator Compressor Run

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Troubleshooting Guides

8-3 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

ERROR CODE TEST / ACTION

a. Check refrigerator compartment thermistor electrical connections and continuity from thermistor to J1

on control board. Reconnect / repair connections.

b. Check resistance of refrigerator compartment thermistor for 30,000 to 33,000 ohms at 32°F (0°C).

Replace if defective.

a. Check refrigerator evaporator thermistor electrical connections and continuity from thermistor to J1 on

control board. Reconnect / repair connections.

b. Check resistance of refrigerator evaporator thermistor for 30,000 to 33,000 ohms at 32°F (0°C).

Replace if defective.

a. Check freezer compartment thermistor electrical connections and continuity from thermistor to J1 on

control board. Reconnect / repair connections.

b. Check resistance of freezer compartment thermistor for 30,000 to 33,000 ohms at 32°F (0°C).

Replace if defective.

a. Check freezer evaporator thermistor electrical connections and continuity from thermistor to J1 on

control board. Reconnect / repair connections.

b. Check resistance of freezer evaporator thermistor for 30,000 to 33,000 ohms at 32°F (0°C). Replace

if defective.

a. With a cold evaporator (< 10°F/ < -12°C), initiate Manual Defrost. If compressor starts 5 minutes after

defrost is initiated, check Grey/White wire connections and continuity from defrost heater to J4-4 on

control board. Reconnect / repair Grey/White wire &/or electrical connections.

b. Check for proper ohm readings of defrost heater. Replace heater if defective.

c. Check defrost terminator and its electrical connections, Reconnect / repair bad connections or replace

terminator if defective.

d. Initiate Manual Defrost, check for 115V AC at E2 on control board. If no voltage, replace board.

e. Initiate Manual Defrost, check for 115V AC from E2 (Blue Wire) on control board to defrost terminator.

Reconnect / repair blue wire &/or electrical connections.

f. Reference wiring diagram to identify components in same White wire circuit as defrost heater. Check

all White wire electrical connections and continuity from defrost heater to J7-8 on control board.

a. Check for proper mounting and location of freezer evaporator thermistor and defrost heater. Remount

correctly.

b. Check for correct wire connection at control board, Blue wire at E2 on control board. If connected to

wrong pin, reconnect correctly.

c Check for electrical short of Blue wire to another circuit. Repair Blue wire &/or electrical connections.

d. Check for proper operation of defrost terminator: Cut-in 30°F(-1°C) / Cut-out 55°F (13°C). For model

601F-2 ONLY: Cut-in 30°F (-1°C) / Cut-out 70°F (21°C). Replace if defective.

a. Initiate Manual Defrost. If compressor starts 5 minutes after defrost is initiated, check Grey/White wire

connections and continuity from defrost heater to J4-4 on control board. Reconnect / repair

Grey/White wire &/or electrical connections.

a. Check for proper mounting and location of freezer evaporator thermistor and defrost heater. Remount

correctly.

b. Check for correct wire connection at control board, Blue wire at E2 on control board. If connected to

wrong pin, reconnect correctly.

c Check for electrical short of Blue wire to another circuit. Repair Blue wire &/or electrical connections.

d. Initiate Manual Defrost. If compressor starts 5 minutes after defrost is initiated, check Grey/White wire

connections and continuity from defrost heater to J4-4 on control board. Reconnect / repair

Grey/White wire &/or electrical connections.

a. Check for proper ohm readings of defrost heater. Replace heater if defective.

b. Check for proper mounting and location of freezer evaporator thermistor and defrost heater. Remount

correctly.

ERROR CODE TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

NOTE: After repairs, always clear Error Codes by pressing Bell ON/OFF key for 15 seconds.

Troubleshooting Guides Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

8-4

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

ERROR CODE TEST / ACTION

A. Check for jammed cube in icemaker.

B. Reference wiring diagram to identify components in same White wire circuit as water valve solenoid.

Check all White wire electrical connections and continuity from water valve solenoid to J7-8 on control

board.

A. If Error Code 07, 20, 21, 22, 23, or 24 is also displayed during Diagnostic Mode, see Test/Actions

under that code.

B. Check for obstructions to freezer door/drawer closing. Remove obstruction.

C. Check cleanliness of condenser. Clean if needed.

D. Check for obstruction to condenser fan blade or loose fan blade. Remove obstruction/Tighten Blade.

E. Check evaporator fan blade position and for obstructions. Reposition if incorrect/Remove obstruction.

F. Check resistance of freezer compartment thermistor - 30,000 to 33,000 ohms at 32°F (0°C). Replace

if defective.

G. With unit on, check to see if lights shut off when light switch is depressed. Repair defective wiring or

replace defective switch.

H. With freezer compressor running:

1. (Model 601F-2 only) Check for 115 V AC from compressor to condenser fan. Repair defective

wiring or replace defective motor.

2. (All models except 601R-2, 601RG-2, 601F-2) check for 115 V AC from control board to con-

denser fan. Repair defective wiring, or replace defective motor, or replace defective board.

I. (All models) With freezer compressor running and fan switches depressed, check for 115 V AC from

compressor to evaporator fan motor. Repair wiring, or replace defective switch, or replace defective

fan motor.

J. Check sealed system for leaks, restrictions or inefficient compressor.

A. If Error Code 05, or 06 is also displayed during Diagnostic Mode, see Test/Actions under that code.

B. Check for obstructions to refrigerator door closing. Remove obstruction.

C. Check cleanliness of condenser. Clean if needed.

D. Check for obstruction to condenser fan blade or loose fan blade. Remove obstruction/Tighten Blade.

E. Check evaporator fan blade position and for obstructions. Reposition if incorrect/Remove obstruction.

F. Check resistance of refrigerator compartment thermistor - 30,000 to 33,000 ohms at 32°F (0°C).

Replace if defective.

G. With unit on, check to see if lights shut off when light switch is depressed. Repair defective wiring or

replace defective switch.

H. With refrigerator compressor running:

1. (Models 601R-2 and 601RG-2 only) Check for 115 V AC from compressor to condenser fan.

Repair defective wiring or replace defective motor.

2. (All models except 601R-2, 601RG-2, 601F-2) check for 115 V AC from control board to con-

denser fan. Repair defective wiring, or replace defective motor, or replace defective board.

I. (All models) With refrigerator compressor running and fan switches depressed, check for 115 V AC

from compressor to evaporator fan motor. Repair wiring, or replace defective switch, or replace

defective fan motor.

J. Check sealed system for leaks, restrictions or inefficient compressor.

ERROR CODE TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

NOTE: After repairs, always clear Error Codes by pressing Bell ON/OFF key for 15 seconds.

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Troubleshooting Guides

8-5 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Thermistor Location Code Tables

THERMISTOR LOCATION CODE

Freezer Compartment F

Refrigerator Compartment r

Freezer Evaporator FE

Refrigerator Evaporator rE

ALL MODELS EXCEPT 601’s

THERMISTOR LOCATION CODE

Refrigerator Compartment r

Refrigerator Evaporator rE

MODEL 601R & 601RG

THERMISTOR LOCATION CODE

Freezer Compartment F

Freezer Evaporator FE

MODEL 601F

HOW TO USE GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The General Troubleshooting Guide Table of Contents on the following page indicates how the General Trouble

Shooting Guide is arranged. Match the description of the problem the unit is experiencing with those in the table.

To the left of the problem description is a letter. Locate that letter in the left column of the Troubleshooting Guide.

The information in the center column of the Troubleshooting Guide identifies possible causes for the problem. The

information in the right column explains the tests to perform and/or what action to take to correct the problem.

For Problems “A” through “H”:

1. Begin troubleshooting by observing the compartment set points.

2. If the set-points are normal, initiate Diagnostic Mode by pressing and holding either COLDER key, then press

the UNIT ON/OFF key, then release both keys.

3. When Diagnostic Mode is initiated, check to see if “Error Codes” are present, being sure to toggle through all the

error and temperature readings by pressing either COLDER key or either WARMER key. (See Thermistor

Location Code Tables below.)

4. If Error Codes are present, refer to Error Code Troubleshooting Guide on previous pages.

5. If there are no Error Codes, initiate Manual Component Activation Mode (which lasts for 5 minutes) by pressing

and holding the desired compartment COLDER and UNIT ON/OFF keys for 10 seconds, then observe the evap-

orator temperatures.

NOTE: Verify that the compressor is operating before observing evaporator temperatures. If the problem is in

the refrigerator section, the refrigerator door must be left open for 5 minutes with the compressor running.

6. After observing the evaporator temperatures as instructed above, take note of the “Pointers” in the first column

of the troubleshooting guide under problems “A” through “D”. The “Pointers” list what possible causes to check

based on the evaporator temperatures observed.

For All Problems:

If the unit’s temperature history is needed to help diagnose the problem, initiate Temperature Log Recall Mode as

described below. This allows the preceding fourteen days of the unit’s temperature history to be observed.

a. To View Compartment Temperature History Only: Begin with the unit ON. Now, press and hold the desired

compartment WARMER key, then press the UNIT ON/OFF key, then release both keys.

b. To View Compartment or Evaporator Temperature History: Begin with the unit on and in Diagnostic Mode.

While in Diagnostic Mode, toggle through the readings until the desired thermistor temperature is displayed on

the LCD. Now, press the WARMER key for that compartment and the UNIT ON/OFF key simultaneously.

Troubleshooting Guides Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

8-6

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE TABLE OF CONTENTS

Ltr Problem Description Page #

A. Error Codes and “SERVICE” Flashing ............................................................................................................................... 8-7

B. “EE” Displayed in Place of Freezer Temperature with “SERVICE” Flashing ................................................................... 8-7

C. “EE” Displayed in Place of Refrigerator Temperature with “SERVICE” Flashing ............................................................ 8-7

D. Warm or Normal Temperatures Displayed with “SERVICE” Alone Flashing .................................................................... 8-7

E. Warm or Normal Temperatures Displayed with non-flashing “SERVICE” Displayed ........................................................ 8-7

F. Erratic Temperatures with or without “SERVICE” Flashing ............................................................................................... 8-7

G. Warm Freezer Compartment Temp. with “SERVICE” Flashing on the LCD ..................................................................... 8-7

H. Warm Freezer Compartment Temp. without “SERVICE” Flashing on the LCD ................................................................. 8-9

I. Warm Refrigerator Compartment Temp. with “SERVICE” Flashing on the LCD .............................................................. 8-11

J. Warm Refrigerator Compartment Temp. without “SERVICE” Flashing on the LCD ......................................................... 8-12

K. Warm or Normal Temp. in Both Compartment with “SERVICE” Flashing on the LCD .................................................... 8-13

L. Warm Temp. in Both Compartments without “SERVICE” Flashing on the LCD ................................................................ 8-14

M. Product Temp. 10° or More Colder or Warmer than Displayed Temp. .............................................................................. 8-14

N. 1. “Extremely” Cold Temp. Displayed - (1° to 7° in Refrigerator and -21° to -15° in Freezer) ......................................... 8-14

2. If outside U.S. - “Extremely” Warm Temp. Displayed - (34° to 45° in Refrig. and -5° to 5° in Freezer) ....................... 8-14

O. No Ice with "ICE" and “SERVICE” Flashing on LCD ...................................................................................................... 8-15

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Troubleshooting Guides

8-7 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE TEST / ACTION

A. Error Codes & “SERVICE”

Flashing

B. “EE” Displayed in Place of

Freezer Temperature with

“SERVICE” Flashing

C. “EE” Displayed in place of

Refrigerator Temperature

with “SERVICE” Flashing

D. Warm or Normal Temp’s

Displayed with “SERVICE”

Alone Flashing

E. Warm or Normal

Temperatures Displayed with

non-flashing “SERVICE”

Displayed

F. Erratic Temperatures with or

without “SERVICE” Flashing

G. Warm Freezer Temperature

with “SERVICE” Flashing

Pointers:

1. Evap Temp -20°F (-29°C) or

lower, see:

• Door ajar

• Lights ON w/door closed

• Evaporator fan fault

• Compartment thermistor mis-

read

• Evaporator heavily frosted

• Sealed system fault: leak or

partial restriction

2. Evap Temp between -19°F

(-28°C) and 0°F (-17°C), see:

• Condenser Air Flow

• Compartment thermistor mis-

read

• Sealed system fault: leak

3. Evaporator Temp 0°F (-17°C)

or higher, see:

• Power to compressor fault

• Sealed system Fault: leak,

restriction, inefficient compres-

sor

(Continued)

(See NOTES on next page)

Unit Experienced Temperature Problems

Freezer Compartment Thermistor

Disconnected, Shorted, or Misread

Refrigerator Compartment Thermistor

Disconnected, Shorted, or Misread

Unit Experienced Temperature Problems

Refrigerator Evaporator Thermistor

Disconnected, Shorted, or Misread

Error Codes Observed in Diagnostic

Mode, but not Cleared from Memory

Control Board Configured for Wrong

Model

Door Ajar

a. Food product obstruction

b. Door/cabinet hinge problem

Condenser Air Flow

a. Dirty condenser

b. Condenser fan blade obstructed or

blade is loose

c. Condenser fan motor disconnected

d. Condenser fan motor defective

e. No power from control board to con-

denser fan (Does not apply to single

compressor models)

(NOTE: A compressor must be running)

See Error Code Troubleshooting Guide

Check wiring from thermistor to control

board. Reconnect/repair connections.

Resistance of thermistor = 30,000-33,000

ohms at 32°F/0°C. Replace if defective.

Check wiring from thermistor to control

board. Reconnect/repair connections.

Resistance of thermistor = 30,000-33,000

ohms at 32°F/0°C. Replace if defective.

See Error Code Troubleshooting Guide

Check wiring from thermistor to control

board. Reconnect/repair connections.

Resistance of thermistor = 30,000-33,000

ohms at 32°F/0°C. Replace if defective.

Enter diagnostic mode to observe error

codes. See Error Code Troubleshooting

Guide. Verify unit was repaired for error

codes displayed. Press and hold alarm key

for 15 seconds to clear error codes.

If possible, reconfigure to correct model. If

not possible, replace control board.

a. Move obstruction.

b. Check and replace hinge if defective.

a. Clean condenser.

b. Remove obstruction or tighten nut on motor

shaft.

c. Check electrical connections from motor to

J7-1 on control board, or from motor to com-

pressor on single compressor models.

Reconnect / repair connections.

d. Check for 115V AC to motor, replace motor

if defective.

e. Check for 115V AC at J7-1 on control board

(with compressor running). Replace board if

defective.

Troubleshooting Guides Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

8-8

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE TEST / ACTION

(Continued)

G. Warm Freezer Temperature

with “SERVICE” Flashing

Pointers:

1. Evap Temp -20°F (-29°C) or

lower, see:

• Door ajar

• Lights ON w/door closed

• Evaporator fan fault

• Compartment thermistor mis-

read

• Evaporator heavily frosted

• Sealed system fault: leak or

partial restriction

2. Evap Temp between -19°F

(-28°C) and 0°F (-17°C), see:

• Condenser Air Flow

• Compartment thermistor mis-

read

• Sealed system fault: leak

3. Evaporator Temp 0°F (-17°C)

or higher, see:

• Power to compressor fault

• Sealed system Fault: leak,

restriction, inefficient compres-

sor

NOTE: “Pointers” do not apply to

cabinet initial pulldown from

ambient temperatures.

NOTE: To clear flashing SER-

VICE indicator after repairs,

power OFF, then back ON.

NOTE: To clear non-flashing

SERVICE indicator after repairs,

press door ajar alarm bell

ON/OFF key for 15 seconds.

Light ON with Door Closed

a. Switch depressor missing or bent, not

depressing light switch

b. Faulty light switch

Evaporator Fan Fault

a. Switch depressor missing or bent, not

depressing fan switch

b. Fan blade obstructed or out of position

c. Faulty fan switch

(NOTE: A compressor must be running)

d. Evaporator fan motor disconnected

e. Evaporator fan motor defective

(NOTE: Compressor must be running)

Compartment Thermistor Misread

Evaporator Heavily Frosted

a. Door ajar

b. Evaporator fan fault

c. Compartment thermistor misread

d. Defrost heater or drain trough heater

disconnected or faulty

e. Defrost terminator disconnected or

faulty.

f. Defrost sense line disconnected.

g. No power from control board to defrost

circuit

Power to Compressor Fault

Sealed System Fault

• Sealed System Leak

• Sealed System Restriction

• Inefficient Compressor

a. Replace/straighten switch depressor.

b. Check operation of light switches, lights off

when switch is depressed. Replace switch if

defective.

a. Replace/straighten switch depressor.

b. Move obstruction or reposition blade.

c. Check for 115V AC to fan switch, depress

fan switch and check for 115V AC from

switch to motor. Replace switch if defective.

d. Check electrical connections of motor.

Reconnect / repair bad connections.

e. Check for 115V AC at fan motor with fan

switch depressed. Replace motor if defec-

tive.

Check resistance of compartment thermistor

for 30,000 to 33,000 ohms at 32°F (0°C).

Replace if defective.

a. See Door Ajar on previous page.

b. See Evaporator Fan Fault on previous page.

c. See Compartment Thermistor Misread on

previous page.

d. Check electrical connections of heaters.

Reconnect / repair bad connections. Check

resistance of heaters, replace if defective.

e. Check electrical connections, Reconnect /

repair bad connections or replace terminator

if defective.

f. Look for Error Codes 20, 22 or 23 or

Manually initiate defrost by pressing ICE key

for 5 seconds. If defrost lasts exactly 5 min-

utes, check all connections of gray/white

wire from terminator to J4-4 on control

board. Reconnect / repair bad connections.

g. Manually initiate defrost by pressing ICE key

for 5 seconds. Check for 115V AC at E2 on

control board. Replace control board if

defective.

Initiate Manual Component Activation Mode

and check for 115V AC at E7 on control

board. Replace control board if defective.

See Sealed System Diagnostic Tables at

back of Troubleshooting Guide

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Troubleshooting Guides

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE TEST / ACTION

H. Warm Freezer Temperatures

without “SERVICE” Flashing

Pointers:

1. “Sr” appears during Diagnostic

Mode, see:

• Unit in Showroom Mode

2. Evap Temp -20°F (-29°C) or

lower, see:

• Door ajar

• Lights ON w/door closed

• Evaporator fan fault

• Compartment thermistor mis-

read

• Evaporator heavily frosted

• Sealed system fault: leak or

partial restriction

3. Evap Temp between -19°F

(-28°C) and 0°F (-17°C), see:

• Warm food load

• High room ambient

• Door ajar

• Condenser Air Flow

• Compartment thermistor mis-

read

• Sealed system fault: leak

4. Evaporator Temp 0°F (-17°C)

or higher, see:

• Power to compressor fault

• Sealed system Fault: leak,

restriction, inefficient compres-

sor

NOTE: “Pointers” do not apply to

cabinet initial pulldown from

ambient temperatures.

NOTE: To clear non-flashing

SERVICE indicator after repairs,

press door ajar alarm bell

ON/OFF key for 15 seconds.

(Continued)

No Power to Unit

Unit Switched OFF

Unit in Showroom Mode

Control Set Too High

Warm Food Load

High Room Ambient

Door Ajar

a. Food product obstruction

b. Door/cabinet hinge problem

Condenser Air Flow

a. Dirty condenser

b. Condenser fan blade obstructed or

blade is loose

c. Condenser fan motor disconnected

d. Condenser fan motor defective

e. No power from control board to con-

denser fan (Does not apply to single

compressor models)

(NOTE: A compressor must be running)

Light ON with Door Closed

a. Switch depressor missing or bent, not

depressing light switch

b. Faulty light switch

Check power to unit, plug unit in or switch

supply circuit breaker ON.

Check for “OFF” displayed at LCD. If off,

press UNIT ON/OFF key.

Press UNIT ON/OFF key to OFF, then press

and hold WARMER & COLDER keys, and

press UNIT ON/OFF key.

Check set-point. If high, adjust.

Check contents of freezer for warm food

load. Instruct customer.

Instruct customer unit performs best

between 60°F(16°C) and 90°F(32°C).

a. Move obstruction.

b. Check and replace hinge if defective.

a. Clean condenser.

b. Remove obstruction or tighten nut on motor

shaft.

c. Check electrical connections from motor to

J7-1 on control board, or from motor to com-

pressor on single compressor models.

Reconnect / repair connections.

d. Check for 115V AC to motor, replace motor

if defective.

e. Check for 115V AC at J7-1 on control board

(with compressor running). Replace board if

defective.

a. Replace/straighten switch depressor.

b. Check operation of light switches, lights off

when switch is depressed. Replace switch if

defective.

8-9 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Troubleshooting Guides Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

8-10

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE TEST / ACTION

(Continued)

H. Warm Freezer Temperatures

without “SERVICE” Flashing

Pointers:

1. “Sr” appears during Diagnostic

Mode, see:

• Unit in Showroom Mode

2. Evap Temp -20°F (-29°C) or

lower, see:

• Door ajar

• Lights ON w/door closed

• Evaporator fan fault

• Compartment thermistor mis-

read

• Evaporator heavily frosted

• Sealed system fault: leak or

partial restriction

3. Evap Temp between -19°F

(-28°C) and 0°F (-17°C), see:

• Warm food load

• High room ambient

• Door ajar

• Condenser Air Flow

• Compartment thermistor mis-

read

• Sealed system fault: leak

4. Evaporator Temp 0°F (-17°C)

or higher, see:

• Power to compressor fault

• Sealed system Fault: leak,

restriction, inefficient compres-

sor

NOTE: “Pointers” do not apply to

cabinet initial pulldown from

ambient temperatures.

NOTE: To clear non-flashing

SERVICE indicator after repairs,

press door ajar alarm bell

ON/OFF key for 15 seconds.

Evaporator Fan Fault

a. Switch depressor missing or bent, not

depressing fan switch

b. Fan blade obstructed or out of position

c. Faulty fan switch

(NOTE: A compressor must be running)

d. Evaporator fan motor disconnected

e. Evaporator fan motor defective

(NOTE: Compressor must be running)

Compartment Thermistor Misread

Evaporator Heavily Frosted

a. Door ajar

b. Evaporator fan fault

c. Compartment thermistor misread

d. Defrost heater or drain trough heater

disconnected or faulty

e. Defrost terminator disconnected or

faulty.

f. Defrost sense line disconnected.

g. No power from control board to defrost

circuit

Power to Compressor Fault

Sealed System Fault

• Sealed System Leak

• Sealed System Restriction

• Inefficient Compressor

a. Replace/straighten switch depressor.

b. Move obstruction or reposition blade.

c. Check for 115V AC to fan switch, depress

fan switch and check for 115V AC from

switch to motor. Replace switch if defective.

d. Check electrical connections of motor.

Reconnect / repair bad connections.

e. Check for 115V AC at fan motor with fan

switch depressed. Replace motor if defec-

tive.

Check resistance of compartment thermistor

for 30,000 to 33,000 ohms at 32°F (0°C).

Replace if defective.

a. See Door Ajar on previous page.

b. See Evaporator Fan Fault on previous page.

c. See Compartment Thermistor Misread on

previous page.

d. Check electrical connections of heaters.

Reconnect / repair bad connections. Check

resistance of heaters, replace if defective.

e. Check electrical connections, Reconnect /

repair bad connections or replace terminator

if defective.

f. Look for Error Codes 20, 22 or 23 or

Manually initiate defrost by pressing ICE key

for 5 seconds. If defrost lasts exactly 5 min-

utes, check all connections of gray/white

wire from terminator to J4-4 on control

board. Reconnect / repair bad connections.

g. Manually initiate defrost by pressing ICE key

for 5 seconds. Check for 115V AC at E2 on

control board. Replace control board if

defective.

Initiate Manual Component Activation Mode

and check for 115V AC at E7 on control

board. Replace control board if defective.

See Sealed System Diagnostic Tables at

back of Troubleshooting Guide

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Troubleshooting Guides

8-11 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE TEST / ACTION

I. Warm Refrigerator

Temperatures with

“SERVICE” Flashing

Pointers:

Refrigerator door must be open

and compressor running for five

minutes.

1. “EE” appears in place of refrig-

erator evap. temperature, see:

• Evaporator thermistor discon-

nected or shorted

2. Evaporator Temp 15°F (-9°C)

or lower within 5 minutes

w/door open, see:

• Door ajar

• Lights stay ON

• Evaporator fan fault

• Compartment or evaporator

thermistor misread

• Evaporator heavily frosted

• Sealed system fault: leak or

partial restriction

3. Evaporator Temp cannot pull

below 30°F (-1°C) within 5

minutes w/door open, see:

• Condenser Air Flow

• Compartment or evaporator

thermistor misread

• Sealed system fault: leak or

inefficient compressor

4. Evaporator Temp 35°F (2°C) or

higher after 5 minutes w/door

open, see:

• Condenser Air Flow

• Power to compressor fault

• Sealed system fault: leak,

restriction or inefficient com-

pressor

NOTE: “Pointers” do not apply to

cabinet initial pulldown from

ambient temperatures.

NOTE: To clear flashing SER-

VICE indicator after repairs,

power OFF, then back ON.

NOTE: To clear non-flashing

SERVICE indicator after repairs,

press door ajar alarm bell

ON/OFF key for 15 seconds.

(Continued)

Door Ajar

a. Food product obstruction

b. Door/cabinet hinge problem

Condenser Air Flow

a. Dirty condenser

b. Condenser fan blade obstructed or

blade is loose

c. Condenser fan motor disconnected

d. Condenser fan motor defective

e. No power from control board to con-

denser fan (Does not apply to single

compressor models)

(NOTE: A compressor must be running)

Light ON with Door Closed

a. Switch depressor missing or bent, not

depressing light switch

b. Faulty light switch

Evaporator Fan Fault

a. Switch depressor missing or bent, not

depressing fan switch

b. Fan blade obstructed or out of position

c. Faulty fan switch

(NOTE: A compressor must be running)

d. Evaporator. fan motor disconnected

e. Evaporator fan motor defective

(NOTE: Compressor must be running)

Evaporator Thermistor Disconnected or

Shorted

Compartment or Evaporator Thermistor

Misread

Evaporator Heavily Frosted

a. Door or drawer ajar

b. Evaporator fan fault

c. Thermistor misread

a. Move obstruction.

b. Check and replace hinge if defective.

a. Clean condenser.

b. Remove obstruction or tighten nut on motor

shaft.

c. Check electrical connections from motor to

J7-1 on control board, or from motor to com-

pressor on single compressor models.

Reconnect / repair connections.

d. Check for 115V AC to motor, replace motor

if defective.

e. Check for 115V AC at J7-1 on control board

(with compressor running). Replace board if

defective.

a. Replace/straighten switch depressor.

b. Check operation of light switches, lights off

when switch is depressed. Replace switch if

defective.

a. Replace/straighten switch depressor.

b. Move obstruction or reposition blade.

c. Check for 115V AC to fan switch, depress

fan switch and check for 115V AC from

switch to motor. Replace switch if defective.

d. Check electrical connections of motor.

Reconnect / repair bad connections.

e. Check for 115V AC at fan motor with fan

switch depressed. Replace motor if defec-

tive.

Check for “EE” & “rE” in diagnostic mode.

Check refrigerator evaporator thermistor

electrical connections from thermistor to J1

on control board. Reconnect / repair con-

nections. Check resistance of refrigerator

evaporator thermistor for 30,000 to 33,000

ohms at 32°F (0°C). Replace if defective.

Check resistance of refrigerator compart-

ment and evaporator thermistors for 30,000

to 33,000 ohms at 32°F (0°C). Replace if

defective.

a. See Door Ajar above.

b. See Evaporator Fan Fault above.

c. See Thermistor Misread above.

Troubleshooting Guides Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

8-12

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE TEST / ACTION

(Continued)

I. Warm Refrigerator

Temperatures with

“SERVICE” Flashing

(See Pointers on previous page)

J. Warm Refrigerator

Temperatures without

“SERVICE” Flashing

Pointers:

Refrigerator door must be open

and compressor running for five

minutes.

1. “Sr” appears during Diagnostic

Mode, see:

• Unit in Showroom Mode

2. Evaporator Temp 15°F (-9°C)

or lower within 5 minutes

w/door open, see:

• Door ajar

• Lights stay ON

• Evaporator fan fault

• Compartment or evaporator

thermistor misread

• Evaporator heavily frosted

• Sealed system fault: leak or

partial restriction

3. Evaporator Temp cannot pull

below 30°F (-1°C) within 5

minutes w/door open, see:

• Warm food load

• High room ambient

• Door ajar

• Condenser Air Flow

• Compartment or evaporator

thermistor misread

• Sealed system fault: leak or

inefficient compressor

4. Evaporator Temp 35°F (2°C) or

higher after 5 minutes w/door

open, see:

• Condenser Air Flow

• Power to compressor fault

• Sealed system fault: leak,

restriction or inefficient com-

pressor

NOTE: “Pointers” do not apply to

cabinet initial pulldown from

ambient temperatures.

NOTE: To clear non-flashing

SERVICE indicator after repairs,

press door ajar alarm bell

ON/OFF key for 15 seconds.

(Continued)

Power to Compressor Fault

Sealed System Fault

• Sealed System Leak

• Sealed System Restriction

• Inefficient Compressor

No Power to Unit

Unit Switched OFF

Unit in Showroom Mode

Control Set Too High

Warm Food Load

High Room Ambient

Door Ajar

a. Food product obstruction

b. Door/cabinet hinge problem

Condenser Air Flow

a. Dirty condenser

b. Condenser fan blade obstructed or

blade is loose

c. Condenser fan motor disconnected

d. Condenser fan motor defective

e. No power from control board to con-

denser fan (Does not apply to single

compressor models)

(NOTE: A compressor must be running)

Light ON with Door Closed

a. Switch depressor missing or bent, not

depressing light switch

b. Faulty light switch

Check for 115V AC E6 on control board.

Replace control board if defective.

See Sealed System Diagnostic Tables at

back of Troubleshooting Guide

Check power to unit, plug unit in or switch

supply circuit breaker ON.

Check for “OFF” displayed at LCD. If off,

press UNIT ON/OFF key.

Press UNIT ON/OFF key to OFF, then press

and hold WARMER & COLDER keys, and

press UNIT ON/OFF key.

Check set-point. If high, adjust.

Check contents of refrigerator for warm food

load. Instruct customer.

Instruct customer unit performs best

between 60°F(16°C) and 90°F(32°C).

a. Move obstruction.

b. Check and replace hinge if defective.

a. Clean condenser.

b. Remove obstruction or tighten nut on motor

shaft.

c. Check electrical connections from motor to

J7-1 on control board, or from motor to com-

pressor on single compressor models.

Reconnect / repair connections.

d. Check for 115V AC to motor, replace motor

if defective.

e. Check for 115V AC at J7-1 on control board

(with compressor running). Replace board if

defective.

a. Replace/straighten switch depressor.

b. Check operation of light switches, lights off

when switch is depressed. Replace switch if

defective.

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Troubleshooting Guides

8-13 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE TEST / ACTION

(Continued)

J. Warm Refrigerator

Temperatures without

“SERVICE” Flashing

(See Pointers on previous page)

K. Warm or Normal

Temperatures in Both

Compartments with

“SERVICE” Flashing

Evaporator Fan Fault

a. Switch depressor missing or bent, not

depressing fan switch

b. Fan blade obstructed or out of position

c. Faulty fan switch

(NOTE: A compressor must be running)

d. Evaporator fan motor disconnected

e. Evaporator fan motor defective

(NOTE: Compressor must be running)

Compartment or Evaporator Thermistor

Misread

Evaporator Heavily Frosted

a. Door or drawer ajar

b. Evaporator fan fault

c. Thermistor misread

Power to Compressor Fault

Sealed System Fault

• Sealed System Leak

• Sealed System Restriction

• Inefficient Compressor

High Room Ambient

Condenser Air Flow

a. Dirty condenser

b. Condenser fan blade obstructed or

blade is loose

c. Condenser fan motor disconnected

d. Condenser fan motor defective

e. No power from control board to con-

denser fan (Does not apply to single

compressor models)

(NOTE: A compressor must be running)

Refrigerator Evaporator Thermistor

Disconnected or Shorted

a. Replace/straighten switch depressor.

b. Move obstruction or reposition blade.

c. Check for 115V AC to fan switch, depress

fan switch and check for 115V AC from

switch to motor. Replace switch if defective.

d. Check electrical connections of motor.

Reconnect / repair bad connections.

e. Check for 115V AC at fan motor with fan

switch depressed. Replace motor if defec-

tive.

Check resistance of refrigerator compart-

ment and evaporator thermistors for 30,000

to 33,000 ohms at 32°F (0°C). Replace if

defective.

a. See Door Ajar on previous page.

b. See Evaporator Fan Fault above.

c. See Thermistor Misread above.

Check for 115V AC E6 on control board.

Replace control board if defective.

See Sealed System Diagnostic Tables at

back of Troubleshooting Guide

Instruct customer unit performs best

between 60°F(16°C) and 90°F(32°C).

a. Clean condenser.

b. Remove obstruction or tighten nut on motor

shaft.

c. Check electrical connections from motor to

J7-1 on control board, or from motor to com-

pressor on single compressor models.

Reconnect / repair connections.

d. Check for 115V AC to motor, replace motor

if defective.

e. Check for 115V AC at J7-1 on control board

(with compressor running). Replace board if

defective.

Check for “EE” & “rE” in diagnostic mode.

Check refrigerator evaporator thermistor

electrical connections from thermistor to

control board. Reconnect / repair connec-

tions. Check resistance of refrigerator evap-

orator thermistor for 30,000 to 33,000 ohms

at 32°F (0°C). Replace if defective.

Troubleshooting Guides Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

8-14

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE TEST / ACTION

L. Warm Temperatures in Both

Compartments without

“SERVICE” Flashing

M. Product Temperature 10° or

More Colder than Displayed

Temperature

N. 1. “Extremely” Cold

Temperatures Displayed

(1° to 7° in Refrigerator and

-21° to -15° in Freezer)

2. If outside US -

“Extremely” Warm

Temperatures Displayed

(34° to 45° in Refrigerator

and -5° to 5° in Freezer)

No Power to Unit

Unit Switched OFF

Unit in Showroom Mode

Control Set Too High

Warm Food Load

High Room Ambient

Door Ajar

a. Food product obstruction

b. Door/cabinet hinge problem

Condenser Air Flow

a. Dirty condenser

b. Condenser fan blade obstructed or

blade is loose

c. Condenser fan motor disconnected

d. Condenser fan motor defective

e. No power from control board to con-

denser fan (Does not apply to single

compressor models)

(NOTE: A compressor must be running)

Compartment Thermistor Misread

1. Control Set to Display Celsius but

Customer Thought it Was Fahrenheit

2. If Outside US - Control Set to Display

Fahrenheit but Customer Thought it

Was Celsius

Check power to unit, plug unit in or switch

supply circuit breaker ON.

Check for “OFF” displayed at LCD. If off,

press UNIT ON/OFF key.

Press UNIT ON/OFF key to OFF, then press

and hold WARMER& COLDER keys, and

press UNIT ON/OFF key.

Check set-point. If high, adjust.

Check contents of freezer for warm food

load. Instruct customer.

Instruct customer unit performs best

between 60°F(16°C) and 90°F(32°C).

a. Move obstruction.

b. Check and replace hinge if defective.

a. Clean condenser.

b. Remove obstruction or tighten nut on motor

shaft.

c. Check electrical connections from motor to

J7-1 on control board, or from motor to com-

pressor on single compressor models.

Reconnect / repair connections.

d. Check for 115V AC to motor, replace motor

if defective.

e. Check for 115V AC at J7-1 on control board

(with compressor running). Replace board if

defective.

Check resistance of compartment thermistor

for 30,000 to 33,000 ohms at 32°F (0°C).

Replace if defective.

1. Switch unit OFF, then ON, then press &

hold Bell key and UNIT ON/OFF key for 10

seconds.

2. Switch unit OFF, then ON, then press & hold

Bell key and UNIT ON/OFF key for 10 sec-

onds.

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Troubleshooting Guides

8-15 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE TEST / ACTION

O. "ICE" and “SERVICE”

Flashing on LCD

Water Valve Energized Longer then

Fifteen Seconds

Check icemaker area for jammed ice cube,

clear jam if present. Check levelness of ice-

maker, level if needed. Check position of fill

cup. Reposition if in ice path.

Check water supply pressure; must be con-

stant 20-100 PSI. If not, instruct customer.

Check water valve operation, opens when

115V AC is applied, closes completely when

115V AC is removed. Water valve Ohms =

160. Replace if defective.

Troubleshooting Guides Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

8-16

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

SEALED SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS TABLES

Before entering sealed system, see General Troubleshooting Guide starting on page 8-5, specifically problems “A” -

“D”, referencing “Pointers” in first column. By initiating Diagnostic Mode and observing evaporator temperatures, you

may find it unnecessary to enter the sealed system. The table on following page also provides a quick reference for

temperature/pressure correlation.

NOTE: Always use solder-on process valves. Do NOT use bolt-on process valves as they are prone to leak.

NOTE: Whenever servicing the sealed system, the high-side filter-drier must be replaced.

NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURES

Model Normal Low-Side Pressures Normal High-Side Pressures

601R-2

601RG-2

601F-2

611-2

611G-2

632-2

642-2

650-2

650G-2

661-2

685-2

695-2

Refrigerator

Freezer

Refrigerator

Freezer

Refrigerator

Freezer

Refrigerator

Freezer

Refrigerator

Freezer

Refrigerator

Freezer

Refrigerator

Freezer

Refrigerator

Freezer

Refrigerator

Freezer

Refrigerator

Freezer

5-12 psi to 35-42 psi

1-3” vacuum to 8-15 psi

5-12 psi to 35-42 psi

1-3” vacuum to 8-15 psi

5-12 psi to 35-42 psi

1-3” vacuum to 8-15 psi

0-10 psi to 30-38 psi

1-3” vacuum to 6-12 psi

0-10 psi to 30-38 psi

1-3” vacuum to 6-12 psi

5-12 psi to 30-38 psi

1-3” vacuum to 6-12 psi

5-12 psi to 30-38 psi

1-3” vacuum to 6-12 psi

5-12 psi to 35-42 psi

0-3” vacuum to 8-15 psi

5-12 psi to 35-42 psi

0-5” vacuum to 8-15 psi

5-12 psi to 35-42 psi

0-5” vacuum to 8-15 psi

90 psi to 100 psi

110 psi to 130 psi

85 psi to 100 psi

75 psi to 90 psi

85 psi to 100 psi

75 psi to 90 psi

85 psi to 100 psi

75 psi to 90 psi

90 psi to 100 psi

75 psi to 90 psi

90 psi to 100 psi

75 psi to 90 psi

90 psi to 100 psi

75 psi to 90 psi

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Troubleshooting Guides

8-17 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE / SEALED SYSTEM LOW-SIDE PRESSURE CORRELATION

Pressure

10” Vac

7” Vac

4” Vac

0” Vac

2 Psi

4 Psi

7 Psi

9 Psi

12 Psi

15 Psi

18 Psi

22 Psi

26 Psi

30 Psi

35 Psi

40 Psi

45 Psi

51 Psi

57 Psi

64 Psi

71 Psi

78 Psi

PRESSURE INDICATIONS

If low side pressure is

NORMAL

LOW

HIGH

& high side pressure is

NORMAL

LOW

HIGH

LOW

HIGH

possible problem is

MECHANICAL

(see General Troubleshooting Guide)

LEAK

RESTRICTION

INEFFICIENT COMPRESSOR

OVER CHARGE

NOTE: The temperature/pressure table at right is for refer-

ence only. A unit's temperature/pressure correlation may

differ from those listed due to: variations in evaporator ther-

mistor location, set-points, where the sealed system is in

the refrigeration cycle, ambient temperature, etc.

If a unit is experiencing temperature problems, it is recom-

mended that you reference the General Troubleshooting

Guide before accessing the sealed system. After all

mechanical and electrical components have been ruled

out, sealed system pressures can be checked by applying

solder-on process valves and referencing the preceding

page. Do NOT use bolt-on process valves as they are

prone to leak.

This table should only be used as a last quick check before

entering the sealed system.

Temperature

-30°F (-34°C)

-25°F (-32°C)

-20°F (-29°C)

-15°F (-26°C)

-10°F (-23°C)

-5°F (-21°C)

0°F (-18°C)

5°F (-15°C)

10°F (-12°C)

15°F (-9°C)

20°F (-7°C)

25°F (-4°C)

30°F (-1°C)

35°F (2°C)

40°F (4°C)

45°F (7°C)

50°F (10°C)

55°F (13°C)

60°F (16°C)

65°F (18°C)

70°F (21°C)

75°F (24°C)

Troubleshooting Guides Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

8-18

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

CONTROL PANEL MEMBRANE SWITCH / RIBBON CABLE TEST

If integrity of control panel assembly is suspect, perform continuity tests at membrane switch ribbon cable terminal

housing. Begin by disconnecting ribbon cable from control board. Disengage control board from control panel.

Remove control panel assembly from unit and place it on solid surface.

Pin 1 Identification Procedure

The ribbon cable wires are exposed at back of terminal housing (see Figure 8-1). If Pin 1 is not labeled on ribbon

cable or terminal housing tag, follow guidelines below to identify Pin 1:

1. If terminal housing is BLUE, then Pin 1 is closest to arrow on housing.

2. If terminal housing is BLACK, check for continuity between first two pins at each end of housing while pushing

UNIT ON/OFF key. If there is continuity, then Pin 1 is at that end.

Continuity Test Procedure

1. Identify model number being serviced in left column of table below.

2. Press key listed at top of table.

3. Corresponding numbers to right of model number and below key being pressed are the pin numbers on terminal

housing that should have continuity.

NOTE: If any continuity tests show failure, replace entire control panel assembly.

UNITICE

WARMERCOLDER REFRIGERATOR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF

FREEZER WARMERCOLDER

Exposed pins on back side of housing.

NOTE: See “How To Identify Pin 1”, above.

Ribbon Cable

Membrane Switch in

Control Panel Assembly

Figure 8-1. Control Panel Assy with Cut-Away View to Show Ribbon Cable (Model 632 Control Panel Shown)

ICE

ON/OFF

KEY

LIGHTS

ON/OFF

KEY

BULK

ICE

KEY

FREEZER

COLDER

KEY

FREEZER

WARMER

KEY

REFRIG

COLDER

KEY

REFRIG

WARMER

KEY

ALARM

( )

ON/OFF

KEY

UNIT

ON/OFF

KEY

MODEL

NA NANANANA4 - 53 - 42 - 51 - 2601R-2

NA 2 - 3NANANA4 - 53 - 42 - 51 - 2601RG-2

2 - 3 NANA4 - 53 - 4NANA2 - 51 - 2601F-2

2 - 3 NANA4 - 53 - 45 - 61 - 62 - 51 - 2611-2

2 - 5 1 - 4NA5 - 61 - 64 - 53 - 42 - 31 - 2611G-2

2 - 3 NANA4 - 53 - 45 - 61 - 62 - 51 - 2632-2

2 - 3 NANA4 - 53 - 45 - 61 - 62 - 51 - 2642-2

2 - 3 NANA4 - 53 - 45 - 61 - 62 - 51 - 2650-2

2 - 5 1 - 4NA5 - 61 - 64 - 53 - 42 - 31 - 2650G-2

2 - 5 NA1 - 45 - 61 - 64 - 53 - 42 - 31 - 2685-2

2 - 5 NA1 - 45 - 61 - 64 - 53 - 42 - 31 - 2695-2

2 - 3 NANA4 - 53 - 45 - 61 - 62 - 51 - 2661-2

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Technical Data

9-1 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

SECTION 9

TECHNICAL DATA

Technical Data Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

9-2

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Model 601R-2 REFRIGERATOR

CHARGE (R-134a Refrigerant)

NOTE: Always check serial tag for exact charge

NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURES

Low Side

High Side

COMPRESSOR

NOTE: Always check current parts price list for possible substitutions.

Service Part No.

Manufacturer

Mfg. Part No.

Original Compressor / Service Compressor Amps

Original Compressor / Service Compressor BTU’s

DEFROST METHOD

DEFROST TERMINATOR

Cut-In Temp.

Cut-Out Temp.

DEFROST HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TUBE HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

FILL TUBE HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

WATER VALVE

Watts

Amps

Ohms (Inductive)

THERMISTORS

(Evap & Compartment) Ohms at 32°F / 0°C

8.5 oz.

5-12 psi to 35-42 psi

90 psi to 100 psi

4201880

Embraco

EMI30HER

1.1 /1.1

280 / 280

“Off Cycle Defrost”

Evap > 38°F before

Compressor ON.

----

30000 - 33000

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Technical Data

9-3 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Model 601RG-2 REFRIGERATOR

CHARGE (R-134a Refrigerant)

NOTE: Always check serial tag for exact charge

NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURES

Low Side

High Side

COMPRESSOR

NOTE: Always check current parts price list for possible substitutions.

Service Part No.

Manufacturer

Mfg. Part No.

Original Compressor / Service Compressor Amps

Original Compressor / Service Compressor BTU’s

DEFROST METHOD

DEFROST TERMINATOR

Cut-In Temp.

Cut-Out Temp.

DEFROST HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TUBE HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

FILL TUBE HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

WATER VALVE

Watts

Amps

Ohms (Inductive)

THERMISTORS

(Evap & Compartment) Ohms at 32°F / 0°C

DOOR HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

8.5 oz.

5-12 psi to 35-42 psi

90 psi to 100 psi

4201880

Embraco

EMI30HER

0.6 /1.1

345 / 280

“Off Cycle Defrost”

Evap > 38°F before

Compressor ON.

----

30000 - 33000

.04

2500 - 2950

Technical Data Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

9-4

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Model 601F-2 FREEZER

CHARGE (R-134a Refrigerant)

NOTE: Always check serial tag for exact charge

NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURES

Low Side

High Side

COMPRESSOR

NOTE: Always check current parts price list for possible substitutions.

Service Part No.

Manufacturer

Mfg. Part No.

Original Compressor / Service Compressor Amps

Original Compressor / Service Compressor BTU’s

DEFROST METHOD

DEFROST TERMINATOR

Cut-In Temp.

Cut-Out Temp.

DEFROST HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TUBE HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TROUGH HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

FILL TUBE HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

WATER VALVE

Watts

Amps

Ohms (Inductive)

THERMISTORS

(Evap & Compartment) Ohms at 32°F / 0°C

10.0 oz.

1-3” vacuum to 8-15 psi

90 psi to 100 psi

4202250

Embraco

EGU80

1.0 / 1.0

820 / 820

“Adaptive Defrost”

Intervals and duration

varies. Followed by 5

min. compressor delay.

30°F / -1°C

70°F / 21°C

640

5.5

19 - 23

.06

1800 - 2100

.45

240 - 280

4.2

.04

3000 - 3500

160

30000 - 33000

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Technical Data

9-5 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Model 611-2 REFRIGERATOR FREEZER

CHARGE (R-134a Refrigerant)

NOTE: Always check serial tag for exact charge

NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURES

Low Side

High Side

COMPRESSOR

NOTE: Always check current parts price list for

possible substitutions.

Service Part No.

Manufacturer

Mfg. Part No.

Original Compressor / Service Compressor Amps

Original Compressor / Service Compressor BTU’s

DEFROST METHOD

DEFROST TERMINATOR

Cut-In Temp.

Cut-Out Temp.

DEFROST HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TUBE HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TROUGH HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

FILL TUBE HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

WATER VALVE

Watts

Amps

Ohms (Inductive)

THERMISTORS

(Evap & Compartment) Ohms at 32°F / 0°C

5.5 oz.

5-12 psi to 35-42 psi

90 psi to 100 psi

4201880

Embraco

EMI30HER

0.5 / 1.1

310 / 280

“Off Cycle Defrost”

Evap > 38°F before

Compressor ON.

----

30000 - 33000

7.0 oz.

1-3” vacuum to 8-15 psi

90 psi to 100 psi

4202280

Embraco

EMI60HER

0.8 / 1.9

605 / 585

“Adaptive Defrost”

Intervals and duration

varies. Followed by 5

min. compressor delay.

30°F / -1°C

55°F / 13°C

640

5.5

19 - 23

----

.04

3000 - 3500

160

30000 - 33000

Technical Data Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

9-6

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Model 611G-2 REFRIGERATOR FREEZER

CHARGE (R-134a Refrigerant)

NOTE: Always check serial tag for exact charge

NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURES

Low Side

High Side

COMPRESSOR

NOTE: Always check current parts price list for

possible substitutions.

Service Part No.

Manufacturer

Mfg. Part No.

Original Compressor / Service Compressor Amps

Original Compressor / Service Compressor BTU’s

DEFROST METHOD

DEFROST TERMINATOR

Cut-In Temp.

Cut-Out Temp.

DEFROST HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TUBE HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TROUGH HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

FILL TUBE HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

WATER VALVE

Watts

Amps

Ohms (Inductive)

THERMISTORS

(Evap & Compartment) Ohms at 32°F / 0°C

DOOR HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

6 oz.

5-12 psi to 35-42 psi

90 psi to 100 psi

4201880

Embraco

EMI30HER

0.6 / 1.1

345 / 280

“Off Cycle Defrost”

Evap > 38°F before

Compressor ON.

----

30000 - 33000

.04

2500 - 2950

7 oz.

1-3” vacuum to 8-15 psi

90 psi to 100 psi

4202280

Embraco

EMI60HER

0.8 / 1.9

605 / 585

“Adaptive Defrost”

Intervals and duration

varies. Followed by 5

min. compressor delay.

30°F / -1°C

55°F / 13°C

640

5.5

19 - 23

----

4.2

.04

3000 - 3500

160

30000 - 33000

----

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Technical Data

9-7 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Model 632-2 REFRIGERATOR FREEZER

CHARGE (R-134a Refrigerant)

NOTE: Always check serial tag for exact charge

NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURES

Low Side

High Side

COMPRESSOR

NOTE: Always check current parts price list for

possible substitutions.

Service Part No.

Manufacturer

Mfg. Part No.

Original Compressor / Service Compressor Amps

Original Compressor / Service Compressor BTU’s

DEFROST METHOD

DEFROST TERMINATOR

Cut-In Temp.

Cut-Out Temp.

DEFROST HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TUBE HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TROUGH HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

FILL TUBE HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

WATER VALVE

Watts

Amps

Ohms (Inductive)

THERMISTORS

(Evap & Compartment) Ohms at 32°F / 0°C

5.5 oz.

0-10 psi to 30-38 psi

110 psi to 130 psi

4201880

Embraco

EMI30HER

0.5 / 1.1

310 / 280

“Off Cycle Defrost”

Evap > 38°F before

Compressor ON.

----

30000 - 33000

7.0 oz.

1-3” vacuum to 6-12 psi

110 psi to 130 psi

4202280

Embraco

EMI60HER

0.8 / 1.9

605 / 585

“Adaptive Defrost”

Intervals and duration

varies. Followed by 5

min. compressor delay.

30°F / -1°C

55°F / 13°C

640

5.5

19 - 23

.06

1800 - 2100

----

4.2

.04

3000 - 3500

160

30000 - 33000

Technical Data Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

9-8

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Model 642-2 REFRIGERATOR FREEZER

CHARGE (R-134a Refrigerant)

NOTE: Always check serial tag for exact charge

NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURES

Low Side

High Side

COMPRESSOR

NOTE: Always check current parts price list for

possible substitutions.

Service Part No.

Manufacturer

Mfg. Part No.

Original Compressor / Service Compressor Amps

Original Compressor / Service Compressor BTU’s

DEFROST METHOD

DEFROST TERMINATOR

Cut-In Temp.

Cut-Out Temp.

DEFROST HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TUBE HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TROUGH HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

FILL TUBE HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

WATER VALVE

Watts

Amps

Ohms (Inductive)

THERMISTORS

(Evap & Compartment) Ohms at 32°F / 0°C

5.5 oz.

0-10 psi to 30-38 psi

110 psi to 130 psi

4201880

Embraco

EMI30HER

0.5 / 1.1

310 / 280

“Off Cycle Defrost”

Evap > 38°F before

Compressor ON.

----

30000 - 33000

7.0 oz.

1-3” vacuum to 6-12 psi

110 psi to 130 psi

4202280

Embraco

EMI60HER

0.8 / 1.9

605 / 585

“Adaptive Defrost”

Intervals and duration

varies. Followed by 5

min. compressor delay.

30°F / -1°C

55°F / 13°C

640

5.5

19 - 23

.06

1800 - 2100

----

4.2

.04

3000 - 3500

160

30000 - 33000

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Technical Data

9-9 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Model 650-2 REFRIGERATOR FREEZER

CHARGE (R-134a Refrigerant)

NOTE: Always check serial tag for exact charge

NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURES

Low Side

High Side

COMPRESSOR

NOTE: Always check current parts price list for

possible substitutions.

Service Part No.

Manufacturer

Mfg. Part No.

Original Compressor / Service Compressor Amps

Original Compressor / Service Compressor BTU’s

DEFROST METHOD

DEFROST TERMINATOR

Cut-In Temp.

Cut-Out Temp.

DEFROST HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TUBE HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TROUGH HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

FILL TUBE HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

WATER VALVE

Watts

Amps

Ohms (Inductive)

THERMISTORS

(Evap & Compartment) Ohms at 32°F / 0°C

5.5 oz

5-12 psi to 35-42 psi

85 psi to 100 psi

4201880

Embraco

EMI30HER

0.5 / 1.1

310 / 280

“Off Cycle Defrost”

Evap > 38°F before

Compressor ON.

----

30000 - 33000

7.0 oz.

1-3” vacuum to 8-15 psi

75 psi to 90 psi

4202280

Embraco

EMI60HER

0.8 / 1.9

605 / 585

“Adaptive Defrost”

Intervals and duration

varies. Followed by 5

min. compressor delay.

30°F / -1°C

55°F / 13°C

640

5.5

19 - 23

----

.04

3000 - 3500

160

30000 - 33000

Technical Data Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

9-10

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Model 650G-2 REFRIGERATOR FREEZER

CHARGE (R-134a Refrigerant)

NOTE: Always check serial tag for exact charge

NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURES

Low Side

High Side

COMPRESSOR

NOTE: Always check current parts price list for

possible substitutions.

Service Part No.

Manufacturer

Mfg. Part No.

Original Compressor / Service Compressor Amps

Original Compressor / Service Compressor BTU’s

DEFROST METHOD

DEFROST TERMINATOR

Cut-In Temp.

Cut-Out Temp.

DEFROST HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TUBE HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TROUGH HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

FILL TUBE HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

WATER VALVE

Watts

Amps

Ohms (Inductive)

THERMISTORS

(Evap & Compartment) Ohms at 32°F / 0°C

DOOR HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

4.5 oz.

5-12 psi to 35-42 psi

85 psi to 100 psi

4201880

Embraco

EMI30HER

0.6 / 1.1

345 / 280

“Off Cycle Defrost”

Evap > 38°F before

Compressor ON.

----

30000 - 33000

.04

2500 - 2950

6.0 oz.

1-3” vacuum to 8-15 psi

75 psi to 90 psi

4202280

Embraco

EMI60HER

0.8 / 1.9

605 / 585

“Adaptive Defrost”

Intervals and duration

varies. Followed by 5

min. compressor delay.

30°F / -1°C

55°F / 13°C

640

5.5

19 - 23

----

4.2

.04

3000 - 3500

160

30000 - 33000

----

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Technical Data

9-11 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Model 661-2 REFRIGERATOR FREEZER

CHARGE (R-134a Refrigerant)

NOTE: Always check serial tag for exact charge

NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURES

Low Side

High Side

COMPRESSOR

NOTE: Always check current parts price list for

possible substitutions.

Service Part No.

Manufacturer

Mfg. Part No.

Original Compressor / Service Compressor Amps

Original Compressor / Service Compressor BTU’s

DEFROST METHOD

DEFROST TERMINATOR

Cut-In Temp.

Cut-Out Temp.

DEFROST HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TUBE HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TROUGH HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

FILL TUBE HEATER

Watts

Amps

Ohms

WATER VALVE

Watts

Amps

Ohms (Inductive)

THERMISTORS

(Evap & Compartment) Ohms at 32°F / 0°C

3.5 oz.

5-12 psi to 35-42 psi

90 psi to 100 psi

4201880

Embraco

EMI30HER

0.5 / 1.1

310 / 280

“Off Cycle Defrost”

Evap > 38°F before

Compressor ON.

----

30000 - 33000

7.0 oz.

0-3” vacuum to 8-15 psi

75 psi to 90 psi

4202250

Embraco

EGU80

1.0 / 1.0

820 / 820

“Adaptive Defrost”

Intervals and duration

varies. Followed by 5

min. compressor delay.

30°F / -1°C

55°F / 13°C

640

5.5

19 - 23

.06

1800 - 2100

----

4.2

.04

3000 - 3500

160

30000 - 33000

Technical Data Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

9-12

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Model 685-2 (Prior to Serial #2271174)

REFRIGERATOR FREEZER

CHARGE (R-134a Refrigerant)

NOTE: Always check serial tag for exact charge

NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURES

Low Side

High Side

COMPRESSOR

NOTE: Always check current parts price list for

possible substitutions.

Service Part No.

Manufacturer

Mfg. Part No.

Original Compressor / Service Compressor Amps

Original Compressor / Service Compressor BTU’s

DEFROST METHOD

DEFROST TERMINATOR Cut-In Temp.

Cut-Out Temp.

DEFROST HEATER Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TUBE HEATER Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TROUGH HEATER Watts

Amps

Ohms

FILL TUBE HEATER Watts

Amps

Ohms

WATER VALVE Watts

Amps

Ohms (Inductive)

THERMISTORS

(Evap & Compartment) Ohms at 32°F / 0°C

MULLION CHUTE HEATER Watts

Amps

Ohms

GLASS WELL HEATER Watts

Amps

(Heater 1) Ohms

(Heater 2) Ohms

9.0 oz.

5-12 psi to 35-42 psi

90 psi to 100 psi

4201880

Embraco

EMI30HER

0.5 / 1.1

310 / 280

“Off Cycle Defrost”

Evap > 38°F before

Compressor ON.

----

260

30000 - 33000

.13

800 - 980

.04

1200 - 1470

3150 - 3680

7.0 oz.

0-5” vacuum to 8-15 psi

75 psi to 90 psi

4202280

Embraco

EMI60HER

0.8 / 1.9

605 / 585

“Adaptive Defrost”

Intervals and duration

varies. Followed by 5

min. compressor delay.

30°F / -1°C

55°F / 13°C

640

5.5

19 - 23

.06

1800 - 2100

.13

840 - 980

4.2

.04

3000 - 3500

160

30000 - 33000

----

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Technical Data

9-13 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Model 695-2 (Prior to Serial #2269189)

REFRIGERATOR FREEZER

CHARGE (R-134a Refrigerant)

NOTE: Always check serial tag for exact charge

NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURES

Low Side

High Side

COMPRESSOR

NOTE: Always check current parts price list for

possible substitutions.

Service Part No.

Manufacturer

Mfg. Part No.

Original Compressor/Service Compressor Amps

Original Compressor/Service Compressor BTU’s

DEFROST METHOD

DEFROST TERMINATOR Cut-In Temp.

Cut-Out Temp.

DEFROST HEATER Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TUBE HEATER Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TROUGH HEATER Watts

Amps

Ohms

FILL TUBE HEATER Watts

Amps

Ohms

WATER VALVE Watts

Amps

Ohms (Inductive)

THERMISTORS

(Evap & Compartment) Ohms at 32°F / 0°C

MULLION CHUTE HEATER Watts

Amps

Ohms (Inductive)

GLASS WELL HEATER Watts

Amps

(Heater 1) Ohms

(Heater 2) Ohms

10.0 oz.

5-12 psi to 35-42 psi

90 psi to 100 psi

4201880

Embraco

EMI30HER

0.5 / 1.1

310 / 280

“Off Cycle Defrost”

Evap > 38°F before

Compressor ON.

----

260

30000 - 33000

.13

800 - 980

.04

1200 - 1470

3150 - 3680

7.0 oz.

0-5” vacuum to 8-15 psi

75 psi to 90 psi

4202280

Embraco

EMI60HER

0.8 / 1.9

605 / 585

“Adaptive Defrost”

Intervals and duration

varies. Followed by 5

min. compressor delay.

30°F / -1°C

55°F / 13°C

640

5.5

19 - 23

.06

1800 - 2100

.13

840 - 980

4.2

.04

3000 - 3500

160

30000 - 33000

----

Technical Data Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

9-14

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Model 685-2 (Starting with Serial #2271174)

REFRIGERATOR FREEZER

CHARGE (R-134a Refrigerant)

NOTE: Always check serial tag for exact charge

NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURES

Low Side

High Side

COMPRESSOR

NOTE: Always check current parts price list for

possible substitutions.

Service Part No.

Manufacturer

Mfg. Part No.

Original Compressor / Service Compressor Amps

Original Compressor / Service Compressor BTU’s

DEFROST METHOD

DEFROST TERMINATOR Cut-In Temp.

Cut-Out Temp.

DEFROST HEATER Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TUBE HEATER Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TROUGH HEATER Watts

Amps

Ohms

FILL TUBE HEATER Watts

Amps

Ohms

WATER VALVE Watts

Amps

Ohms (Inductive)

THERMISTORS

(Evap & Compartment) Ohms at 32°F / 0°C

MULLION CHUTE HEATER Watts

Amps

Ohms

GLASS WELL HEATER Watts

Amps

(Heater 1) Ohms

(Heater 2) Ohms

4.5 oz.

5-12 psi to 35-42 psi

90 psi to 100 psi

4201880

Embraco

EMI30HER

0.5 / 1.1

310 / 280

“Off Cycle Defrost”

Evap > 38°F before

Compressor ON.

----

260

30000 - 33000

.13

800 - 980

.04

1200 - 1470

3150 - 3680

7.0 oz.

0-5” vacuum to 8-15 psi

75 psi to 90 psi

4202280

Embraco

EMI60HER

0.7 / 1.9

575 / 585

“Adaptive Defrost”

Intervals and duration

varies. Followed by 5

min. compressor delay.

30°F / -1°C

55°F / 13°C

450

3.9

28 - 31

----

4.2

.04

3000 - 3500

160

30000 - 33000

----

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Technical Data

9-15 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Model 695-2 (Starting with Serial #2269189)

REFRIGERATOR FREEZER

CHARGE (R-134a Refrigerant)

NOTE: Always check serial tag for exact charge

NORMAL OPERATING PRESSURES

Low Side

High Side

COMPRESSOR

NOTE: Always check current parts price list for

possible substitutions.

Service Part No.

Manufacturer

Mfg. Part No.

Original Compressor/Service Compressor Amps

Original Compressor/Service Compressor BTU’s

DEFROST METHOD

DEFROST TERMINATOR Cut-In Temp.

Cut-Out Temp.

DEFROST HEATER Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TUBE HEATER Watts

Amps

Ohms

DRAIN TROUGH HEATER Watts

Amps

Ohms

FILL TUBE HEATER Watts

Amps

Ohms

WATER VALVE Watts

Amps

Ohms (Inductive)

THERMISTORS

(Evap & Compartment) Ohms at 32°F / 0°C

MULLION CHUTE HEATER Watts

Amps

Ohms (Inductive)

GLASS WELL HEATER Watts

Amps

(Heater 1) Ohms

(Heater 2) Ohms

4.5 oz.

5-12 psi to 35-42 psi

90 psi to 100 psi

4201880

Embraco

EMI30HER

0.5 / 1.1

345 / 280

“Off Cycle Defrost”

Evap > 38°F before

Compressor ON.

----

260

30000 - 33000

.13

800 - 980

.04

1200 - 1470

3150 - 3680

7.0 oz

0-5” vacuum to 8-15 psi

75 psi to 90 psi

4202280

Embraco

EMI60HER

0.7 / 1.9

575 / 585

“Adaptive Defrost”

Intervals and duration

varies. Followed by 5

min. compressor delay.

30°F / -1°C

55°F / 13°C

450

3.9

28 - 31

----

4.2

.04

3000 - 3500

160

30000 - 33000

----

Technical Data Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

9-16

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Wiring Diagrams / Schematics

10-1 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

SECTION 10

WIRING DIAGRAMS

AND SCHEMATICS

Wiring Diagrams / Schematics Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

GREEN

RIBBED 2

PLAIN 1

POWER

SUPPLY

CORD

LIGHT

TERMINATOR

1 ORANGE

2 WHITE

ORANGE

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHTS

ORANGE

WHITE

1 PINK

2 WHITE

3 GREENGREEN

WHITE

RED REFRIGERATOR

FAN MOTOR

CONDENSER

FAN MOTOR

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

RUNNING

CAPACITOR

BLACK

GREEN

WHITE

GRAY

REF

FAN

SWITCH

REF

LIGHT

SWITCH

SENSOR

(REF EVAP)

BLUE W/WHITE STRIPE

SENSOR

(REF CABINET)

YELLOW

GRAY

WHITE

BLACK

ORANGE

WHITE

RED

BLACK

GRAY

YELLOW

ORANGE

RED

WHITE

BLACK

GRAY

RED

WHITE

ORANGE

YELLOW

GREEN

WHITE

GRAY

WHITE

BLACK

ORANGE

YELLOW

RED

GRAY

PART NUMBER 3756711

ORANGE W/ YELLOW STRIPE

BLUE W/ YELLOW STRIPE

CONNECTOR

4321

GREEN

WHITE

GREEN TAN WHITE

GRAY

WHITE

RED

WHITE

ORANGE

CONTROL BOARD DETAIL

DISPLAY

ORANGE

GRAY

BLACK

CONNECTOR

BLUE W/ YELLOW STRIPE

ORANGE W/ YELLOW STRIPE

CONTROL BOARD

BLUE W/ YELLOW STRIPE

ORANGE W/ YELLOW STRIPE

WHITE

-This wiring information is provided for use by qualified

service personnel only.

-Disconnect appliance from electrical supply before

beginning service.

-Be sure all grounding devices are connected when

service is complete.

-Failure to observe the above warnings may result in

severe electrical shock.

NOT USED

BLUE/WHITE

ORANGE/YLW

BLUE/YLW

LOW VOLTAGE THERMISTOR CIRCUITS

REF EVAP

NOT USED

REF COMPARTMENT

REF EVAP

NOT USED

NOT USED(NO PIN)

NOT USED

REF DOOR LIGHT SENSE

NOT USED(NO PIN)

NOT USED

REF COMPRESSOR

LIGHTS

NEUTRAL

DESCRIPTION

POWER IN

120 VOLT CIRCUITS

NOT USED

J7-1 C FAN

DEF HTRE2

E10

CIRCUIT

RCOMP

FCOMP

J7-5

J7-3

J7-2

J7-4

J4-1

J7-7

J7-6

J7-8

E FAN

LITES

NEU

J1-4

J4-5

J4-4

J4-3

J4-2

J1-3

J1-2

J1-1

J1-8

J1-7

J1-6

J1-5

CONTROL BOARD SUMMARY

SENSES REF CABINET TEMP

SENSES REF EVAP TEMP

SENSES IF REF DOOR OPEN

POWERS LIGHTS

POWER INTO BOARD

NEUTRAL INTO BOARD

FUNCTION COLOR

BLACK

YELLOW

ORANGE

WHITE

PIN 1 0J6

PIN 1

0J3

E10

SENSES REF EVAP TEMP

NOT USED

E10

POWERS REF COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER FAN GRAY

WIRING DIAGRAM

MODEL: 601R-2

10-2

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Wiring Diagrams / Schematics

PART NUMBER 3756711

REFRIGERATOR

FAN SWITCH

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHT SWITCH LIGHT

TERMINATOR

REFRIGERATOR

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

NEUT

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHTS

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

REFRIGERATOR

FAN MOTOR

CONDENSER

FAN MOTOR

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING SCHEMATIC

-This wiring information is provided for use by qualified

service personnel only.

-Disconnect appliance from electrical supply before

beginning service.

-Be sure all grounding devices are connected when

service is complete.

-Failure to observe the above warnings may result in

severe electrical shock.

YELLOW ORANGE

E10E7E2 E6

WHITE

BLACK

GRAY

WHITE

RED

ORANGE

WIRING SCHEMATIC

MODEL: 601R-2

10-3 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Wiring Diagrams / Schematics Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

GREEN

RIBBED 2

PLAIN 1

POWER

SUPPLY

CORD

LIGHT

TERMINATOR

1 ORANGE

2 WHITE

ORANGE

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHTS

ORANGE

WHITE

1 PINK

2 WHITE

3 GREENGREEN

WHITE

RED REFRIGERATOR

FAN MOTOR

CONDENSER

FAN MOTOR

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

RUNNING

CAPACITOR

BLACK

GREEN

WHITE

GRAY

REF

FAN

SWITCH

REF

LIGHT

SWITCH

SENSOR

(REF EVAP)

BLUE W/WHITE STRIPE

SENSOR

(REF CABINET)

YELLOW

GRAY

WHITE

BLACK

ORANGE

WHITE

RED

BLACK

GRAY

YELLOW

ORANGE

RED

WHITE

BLACK

GRAY

RED

WHITE

ORANGE

YELLOW

GREEN

WHITE

GRAY

WHITE

BLACK

ORANGE

YELLOW

RED

PART NUMBER 3757370

ORANGE W/ YELLOW STRIPE

BLUE W/ YELLOW STRIPE

CONNECTOR

4321

GREEN

WHITE

GREEN TAN WHITE

GRAY

WHITE

RED

WHITE

ORANGE

CONTROL BOARD DETAIL

DISPLAY

ORANGE

GRAY

BLACK

CONNECTOR

BLUE W/ YELLOW STRIPE

ORANGE W/ YELLOW STRIPE

CONTROL BOARD

BLUE W/ YELLOW STRIPE

ORANGE W/ YELLOW STRIPE

WHITE

RED

WHITE

PINK

ACCENT

LIGHTS

DOOR

HEATER

WHITE

BLUE BLUE

WHITE

PINK

-This wiring information is provided for use by qualified

service personnel only.

-Disconnect appliance from electrical supply before

beginning service.

-Be sure all grounding devices are connected when

service is complete.

-Failure to observe the above warnings may result in

severe electrical shock.

DOOR HEATER

NOT USED

ACCENT LIGHTS

BLUE/WHITE

ORANGE/YLW

BLUE/YLW

LOW VOLTAGE THERMISTOR CIRCUITS

REF EVAP

NOT USED

REF COMPARTMENT

REF EVAP

NOT USED

NOT USED(NO PIN)

NOT USED

REF DOOR LIGHT SENSE

NOT USED(NO PIN)

NOT USED

REF EVAP FAN

NOT USED

REF COMPRESSOR

LIGHTS

NEUTRAL

DESCRIPTION

POWER IN

120 VOLT CIRCUITS

NOT USED

J7-1 C FAN

DEF HTRE2

E10

CIRCUIT

R COMP

F COMP

J7-5

J7-3

J7-2

J7-4

J4-1

J7-7

J7-6

J7-8

E FAN

LITES

J1-4

J4-5

J4-4

J4-3

J4-2

J1-3

J1-2

J1-1

J1-8

J1-7

J1-6

J1-5

CONTROL BOARD SUMMARY

SENSES REF CABINET TEMP

SENSES REF EVAP TEMP

SENSES IF REF DOOR OPEN

POWERS LIGHTS

POWER INTO BOARD

NEUTRAL INTO BOARD

FUNCTION COLOR

BLACK

YELLOW

ORANGE

WHITE

PIN 1 0J6

PIN 1

0J3

E10

SENSES REF EVAP TEMP

NOT USED

E10

POWERS REF COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER FAN GRAY

POWERS DOOR HEATER

ICE

POWERS REF EVAP FAN

BLUE

RED

PINK

NEU

WIRING DIAGRAM

MODEL 601RG-2

10-4

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Wiring Diagrams / Schematics

PART NUMBER 3756711

REFRIGERATOR

FAN SWITCH

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHT SWITCH LIGHT

TERMINATOR

REFRIGERATOR

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

NEUT

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHTS

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

REFRIGERATOR

FAN MOTOR

CONDENSER

FAN MOTOR

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING SCHEMATIC

ACCENT

LIGHTS

DOOR

HEATER

-This wiring information is provided for use by qualified

service personnel only.

-Disconnect appliance from electrical supply before

beginning service.

-Be sure all grounding devices are connected when

service is complete.

-Failure to observe the above warnings may result in

severe electrical shock.

YELLOW ORANGE

E10E7E2 E6

WHITE

BLACK

GRAY

WHITE

RED

ORANGE

RED

PINK

BLUE

2300 - 2900 Ohms

WIRING SCHEMATIC

MODEL: 601RG-2

10-5 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Wiring Diagrams / Schematics Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

GREEN

ICEMAKER

WATER VALVE

WHITE

TAN

GREEN

RIBBED 2

PLAIN 1

POWER

SUPPLY

CORD

LIGHT

TERMINATOR

1 ORANGE

2 WHITE

ORANGE

FREEZER

LIGHTS

ORANGE

WHITE

1 PINK

2 WHITE

3 GREENGREEN

WHITE

RED FREEZER

FAN MOTOR

CONDENSER

FAN MOTOR

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

RUNNING

CAPACITOR

BLACK

GREEN

WHITE

PURPLE

FREEZER

FAN

SWITCH

FREEZER

LIGHT

SWITCH

DEFROST

TERMINATOR GRAY 2

BLUE 1

DEFROST HEATER

SENSOR

(FRE EVAP)

WHITE 2

GRAY 1

BLUE W/BLACK STRIPE

SENSOR

(FRE CABINET)

DRAIN TROUGH HEATER

FILL

TUBE

HEATER

WHITE 2

BLUE 1

DRAIN HEATER

3 BLUE

5 TAN

4 PINK

2 WHITE

1 WHITE W/BLUE STRIPE

ICEMAKER

SWITCH

ICEMAKER

1 GREEN

2 TAN

3 PINK

4 WHITE

WHITE 2

BLUE 1

TAN

6WHITE W/BLUE STRIPE

YELLOW

PURPLE

PINK

WHITE8

BLUE

BLACK

ORANGE

WHITE

RED

BLUE

GRAY W/WHITE STRIPE

GRAY W/WHITE

BLACK

WHITE W/BLUE STRIPE

TAN

PINK

BLUE

PURPLE

YELLOW

ORANGE

RED

WHITE

BLUE W/BLACK

BLACK

PURPLE

TAN

RED

WHITE

ORANGE

YELLOW

PINK

TAN

WHITE

WHITE W/BLUE STRIPE

GREEN

WHITE W/BLUE STRIPE 1

WHITE 2

WHITE

BLUE

WHITE

BLUE

WHITE

GREEN

WHITE

PURPLE

WHITE

BLACK

ORANGE

YELLOW

RED

PURPLE

PART NUMBER 3756690

ORANGE W/ RED STRIPE

BLUE W/ RED STRIPE

CONNECTOR

4321

GREEN

WHITE

GREEN TAN WHITE

PURPLE

WHITE

BLUE

RED

WHITE

ORANGE 4

CONTROL BOARD DETAIL

DISPLAY

ORANGE

GRAY W/WHITE

BLUE

PURPLE

BLACK

CONNECTOR

BLUE W/ RED STRIPE

ORANGE W/ RED STRIPE

CONTROL BOARD

-This wiring information is provided for use by qualified

service personnel only.

-Disconnect appliance from electrical supply before

beginning service.

-Be sure all grounding devices are connected when

service is complete.

-Failure to observe the above warnings may result in

severe electrical shock.

DEFROST HEATER

ICE MAKER VALVE SENSOR

DEF SENSOR

ICE MAKER ACC (FILL TUBE)

ICE MAKER POWERS ICE MAKER

SENSES WATER VALVE ACTIVATION

SENSES WHEN DEF HEATER SHUTS OFF

POWERS FILL TUBE HEATER AND ACCESSORIES

POWERS DEFROST CIRCUIT

WHITE/BLUE

GRAY/WHITE

TAN

BLUE

PINK

BLUE/BLACK

ORANGE/RED

BLUE/RED

LOW VOLTAGE THERMISTOR CIRCUITS

NOT USED

FRZ COMPARTMENT

NOT USED

FRZ EVAP

NOT USED(NO PIN)

NOT USED

FRZ DOOR LIGHT SENSE

NOT USED(NO PIN)

NOT USED

LIGHTS

NEUTRAL

DESCRIPTION

POWER IN

120 VOLT CIRCUITS

FRZ COMPRESSOR

J7-1 C FAN

DEF HTRE2

E10

CIRCUIT

RCOMP

FCOMP

J7-5

J7-3

J7-2

J7-4

J4-1

J7-7

J7-6

J7-8

E FAN

LITES

NEU

J1-4

J4-5

J4-4

J4-3

J4-2

J1-3

J1-2

J1-1

J1-8

J1-7

J1-6

J1-5

CONTROL BOARD SUMMARY

SENSES FRZ CABINET TEMP

SENSES FRZ EVAP TEMP

SENSES IF FRZ DOOR OPEN

POWERS LIGHTS

POWERS FRZ COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER FAN

POWER INTO BOARD

NEUTRAL INTO BOARD

FUNCTION COLOR

PURPLE

BLACK

YELLOW

ORANGE

WHITE

PIN 1 0J6

PIN 1

0J3

E10

SENSES FRZ EVAP TEMP

FRZ EVAP

E10

WIRING DIAGRAM

MODEL: 601F-2

10-6

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Wiring Diagrams / Schematics

PART NUMBER 3756690

FREEZER

FAN SWITCH

FREEZER

LIGHT SWITCH

DEFROST

TERMINATOR

LIGHT

TERMINATOR

FREEZER

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

ICEMAKER

SWITCH

NEUT

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

FILL TUBE

HEATER

FREEZER

LIGHTS

DRAIN TROUGH

HEATER

DRAIN

HEATER

DEFROST

HEATER

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

FREEZER

FAN MOTOR

WATER

VALVE

ICEMAKER

CONDENSER

FAN MOTOR

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

RUNNING

CAPACITOR

HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING SCHEMATIC

-This wiring information is provided for use by qualified

service personnel only.

-Disconnect appliance from electrical supply before

beginning service.

-Be sure all grounding devices are connected when

service is complete.

-Failure to observe the above warnings may result in

severe electrical shock.

1890 OHMS

260 OHMS

21 OHMS

2600 OHMS

YELLOW

WHITE/BLUE

ORANGE

GRAY/WHITE

BLUE

E10E7E2 E6

WHITE

BLACK

TAN

PINK

PURPLE

WHITE

160 OHMS

RED

WIRING SCHEMATIC

MODEL: 601F-2

10-7 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Wiring Diagrams / Schematics Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

1234

PIN 1

DISPLAY

PIN 1 0

PIN 1

E10

120 VOLT CIRCUITS

NOT USED(NO PIN)

ICE MAKER ACC (FILL TUBE)

FRZ DOOR LIGHT SENSE

REF DOOR LIGHT SENSE

NOT USED(NO PIN)

REF COMPARTMENT

FRZ COMPARTMENT

LOW VOLTAGE THERMISTOR CIRCUITS

ICE MAKER VALVE SENSOR

J4-2

J1-3

J1-5

J1-4

J1-6

J1-7

J1-8

J4-3

J4-4

J4-5

J1-1

J1-2 REF EVAP

REF EVAP

REF COMPARTMENT

FRZ EVAP

DEF SENSOR

DEF HTR

J7-3

J7-8

J7-6

J7-7

J7-4

J7-5

J4-1 NEU

LITE

J7-1

J7-2

E10

E FAN

RCOMP

C FAN

FCOMP

NEUTRAL

NOT USED

ICE MAKER

LIGHTS

DEFROST HEATER

FRZ COMPRESSOR

POWER IN

REF COMPRESSOR

CONDENSER FAN

NOT USED POWERS FILL TUBE HEATER AND ACCESSORIES

SENSES WHEN DEF HEATER SHUTS OFF

SENSES WATER VALVE ACTIVATION

SENSES IF REF DOOR OPEN

SENSES FRZ EVAP TEMP

SENSES REF EVAP TEMP

SENSES REF CABINET

SENSES FRZ CABINET TEMP

SENSES REF CABINET

POWERS DEFROST CIRCUIT

NEUTRAL INTO BOARD

POWER INTO BOARD

POWERS FRZ COMPRESSOR

POWERS ICE MAKER

POWERS LIGHTS

POWERS REF COMPRESSOR

POWERS CONDENSER FAN

SENSES IF FRZ DOOR OPEN

ORANGE

ORANGE/YELLOW

BLUE/YELLOW

BLUE/BLACK

BLUE/WHITE

BLUE/RED

ORANGE/RED

GRAY/WHITE

TAN

WHITE/BLUE

WHITE

BROWN

PINK

YELLOW

WHITE/RED

GRAY

BLUE

BLACK

PURPLE

CONTROL BOARD SUMMARY

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION FUNCTION COLOR

E6E10E7E2 J7

-This wiring information is provided for use by qualified

service personnel only.

-Disconnect appliance from electrical supply before

beginning service.

-Be sure all grounding devices are connected when

service is complete.

-Failure to observe the above warnings may result in

severe electrical shock.

1. FAN SWITCH

2. LIGHT SWITCH

3. ICEMAKER SWITCH

PURPLE

WHITE

TAN

WHITE

STARTING

RELAY

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

GREEN

2 RIBBED

1 PLAIN

1 ORANGE

2 WHITE

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHTS

GREEN

WHITE

RED

8 WHITE W/RED STRIPE

6 WHITE W/BLUE STRIPE

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHT SWITCH

SENSOR

(FRZ EVAP)

DEFROST HEATER

1 BLACK

2 BLACK

LIGHTS:

NOTE: (1) LIGHT

IN 611 FREEZER

2 3

ICEMAKER

GREEN 1

TAN 2

PINK 3

WHITE 4

3 GREEN

2 WHITE

1 RED

FREEZER

FAN MOTOR

FILL TUBE

HEATER

ICEMAKER

WATER VALVE

WHITE

TAN

GRAY W/WHITE

3 GREEN

4 ORANGE

8 YELLOW

6 PURPLE

9 TAN

5 BLUE

2 WHITE

DEFROST

TERMINATOR

2 BLACK

1 BLUE

7 PINK

1 WHITE W/BLUE

WHITE W/BLUE

WHITE

TAN

GREEN

PINK

PURPLE

RED

YELLOW

ORANGE

BLUE W/BLACK STRIPE

BLUE W/RED STRIPE

ORANGE W/RED STRIPE

BLUE W/BLACK STRIPE

ORANGE W/YELLOW STRIPE

BLUE W/YELLOW STRIPE

BLUE W/WHITE STRIPE

ORANGE W/RED STRIPE

BLUE W/RED STRIPE

BLUE

PINK

WHITE W/BLUE

TAN

PURPLE

YELLOW

GREEN

GRAY W/WHITE

GREEN

TAN

WHITE

RED

WHITE

GREEN

BLUE

WHITE

GRAY W/WHITE

ORANGE

WHITE

BLUE

PINK

TAN

PURPLE

YELLOW

WHITE W/BLUE STRIPE

GRAY W/WHITE STRIPE

ORANGE

RED

ORANGE

RED

YELLOW

PURPLE

WHITE

GRAY

WHITE

BLACK

GRAY

WHITE

PART NUMBER 3756490

CONNECTOR

4321

GREEN

WHITE

GRAY

GREEN GREEN

BLUE W/YELLOW STRIPE

BLUE W/WHITE STRIPE

ORANGE W/YELLOW STRIPE

REFRIGERATOR

FAN MOTOR

1 PINK

SENSOR

(REF

CABINET)

ORANGE

3 GREEN

2 WHITE

SENSOR

(REF

EVAP)

WHITE

ORANGE

LIGHT

TERMINATOR

REFRIGERATOR

FAN SWITCH

CONDENSER

FAN MOTOR

WHITE W/RED STRIPE 1

WHITE 2

POWER

SUPLY

CORD L2

GRAY W/WHITE

2 WHITE

1 BLACK

SENSOR

(FRZ CABINET)

BLUE W/BLACK STRIPE

4 ORANGE

2 PURPLE

9 GRAY

5 YELLOW

7 BLUE

3 PINK

1 TAN

WHITE

WHITE W/RED STRIPE

WHITE

PURPLE

ORANGE

3 ORANGE

RED

GRAY

(FOUND BY

COMPRESSOR)

CONNECTOR

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

RUNNING

CAPACITOR

WIRING DIAGRAM

MODELS: 611-2 & 650-2

10-8

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Wiring Diagrams / Schematics

-This wiring information is provided for use by qualified

service personnel only.

-Disconnect appliance from electrical supply before

beginning service.

-Be sure all grounding devices are connected when

service is complete.

-Failure to observe the above warnings may result in

severe electrical shock.

J2 J1

E2 E7 E10 E6

ICEMAKER

FREEZER

LIGHT SWITCH

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHT SWITCH LIGHT

TERMINATOR

CONDENSER

FAN MOTOR

DEFROST

TERMINATOR

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHTS

FREEZER

LIGHTS

FILL TUBE

HEATER

DEFROST

HEATER

FREEZER

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

NEUT

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

REFRIGERATOR

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

FREEZER

FAN SWITCH

WATER

VALVE

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

FREEZER

FAN MOTOR

RUNNING

CAPACITOR

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

REFRIGERATOR

FAN SWITCH REFRIGERATOR

FAN MOTOR

ICEMAKER

SWITCH

PART NUMBER 3756490

2600 OHMS

160

WHITE

GRAY

BLACK

PURPLE

TAN

PINK

GRAY/WHITE

BLUE

WHITE/RED

ORANGE

WHITE/BLUE

21 OMMS

WHITE

TAN

PURPLE RED

RED

ORANGE

YELLOW

WIRING SCHEMATIC

MODELS: 611-2 & 650-2

10-9 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Wiring Diagrams / Schematics Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

2 3

1234

CONNECTOR

321

REFRIGERATOR

FAN MOTOR

1 PINK

ORANGE

3 GREEN

2 WHITE

WHITE

ORANGE

LIGHT

TERMINATOR

REFRIGERATOR

FAN SWITCH

CONDENSER

FAN MOTOR

WHITE W/RED STRIPE 1

WHITE 2

POWER

SUPLY

CORD L2

GRAY W/WHITE

BLACK

SENSOR

(FRZ CABINET)

1. FAN SWITCH

2. LIGHT SWITCH

3. ICEMAKER SWITCH

BLUE W/BLACK STRIPE

ORANGE W/BLACK

PURPLE

GRAY

YELLOW

BLUE

PINK

TAN

WHITE W/RED STRIPE

ORANGE

BLUE W/WHITE STRIPE

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

FRZ COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

120 VOLT CIRCUITS

NOT USED(NO PIN)

ACCENT LIGHTS

FRZ DOOR LIGHT SENSE

REF DOOR LIGHT SENSE

NOT USED(NO PIN)

REF COMPARTMENT

FRZ COMPARTMENT

LOW VOLTAGE THERMISTOR CIRCUITS

ICE MAKER VALVE SENSOR

J4-2

J1-3

J1-5

J1-4

J1-6

J1-7

J1-8

J4-3

J4-4

J4-5

J1-1

J1-2 REF EVAP

REF EVAP

REF COMPARTMENT

FRZ EVAP

DEF SENSOR

DEF HTR

J7-3

J7-8

J7-6

J7-7

J7-4

J7-5

J4-1 NEU

LITE

J7-1

J7-2

E10

E FAN

RCOMP

C FAN

FCOMP

NEUTRAL

NOT USED

ICE MAKER/FILL TUBE HTR

LIGHTS

DEFROST HEATER

FRZ COMPRESSOR

POWER IN

REF COMPRESSOR

COND FAN & DOOR HEATER

REF EVAP FAN POWERS ACCENT LIGHTS

SENSES WHEN DEF HEATER SHUTS OFF

SENSES WATER VALVE ACTIVATION

SENSES IF REF DOOR OPEN

SENSES FRZ EVAP TEMP

SENSES REF EVAP TEMP

SENSES REF CABINET

SENSES FRZ CABINET TEMP

SENSES REF CABINET

POWERS DEFROST CIRCUIT

NEUTRAL INTO BOARD

POWER INTO BOARD

POWERS FRZ COMPRESSOR

POWERS ICE MAKER AND FILL TUBE HEATER

POWERS LIGHTS

POWERS REF COMPRESSOR

POWERS CONDENSER FAN AND DOOR HEATER

SENSES IF FRZ DOOR OPEN

ORANGE

ORANGE/YELLOW

BLUE/YELLOW

BLUE/BLACK

BLUE/WHITE

BLUE/RED

ORANGE/RED

GRAY/WHITE

TAN

WHITE/BLUE

WHITE

ORANGE W/BLACK

PINK

YELLOW

WHITE/RED

GRAY

BLUE

BLACK

PURPLE

CONTROL BOARD SUMMARY

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION FUNCTION COLOR

POWERS REF EVAP FAN RED

BLUE W/YELLOW STRIPE

ACCENT LIGHTS

IACC

ICE

FDR

RDR

WHITE

E6E10E7E2 (FOUND BY

COMPRESSOR)

CONNECTOR

ORANGE W/BLACK

4 ORANGE W/BLACK

LIGHTS:

NOTE: (1) LIGHT

IN 611 FREEZER

ICEMAKER

WATER VALVE

WHITE

TAN

BLUE W/BLACK STRIPE

FILL TUBE

HEATER

WHITE 4

GREEN 1

PINK 3

TAN 2

ICEMAKER

WHITE

ORANGE W/ BLACK

YELLOW

RED

PURPLE

PINK

GREEN

TAN

WHITE

TAN

7 PINK

2 WHITE

5 BLUE

9 TAN

6 PURPLE

8 YELLOW

BLUE W/RED STRIPE

ORANGE W/RED STRIPE

BLUE W/WHITE STRIPE

BLUE W/YELLOW STRIPE

ORANGE W/YELLOW STRIPE

BLUE W/BLACK STRIPE

YELLOW

PURPLE

WHITE

BLUE

TAN

PINK

ORANGE W/BLACK

PART NUMBER 3757920 REV A

DEFROST

TERMINATOR

FREEZER

FAN MOTOR

DEFROST HEATER

GRAY W/WHITE

WHITE

2 BLACK

1 BLACK

BLUE

GREEN

WHITE

RED

3 GREEN

GRAY W/WHITE

GREEN

2 BLACK

1 BLUE

2 WHITE

3 GREEN

1 RED

SENSOR

(FRZ EVAP)

ORANGE W/RED STRIPE

BLUE W/YELLOW STRIPE

BLUE W/RED STRIPE

GRAY W/WHITE

GREEN

LIGHT

TERMINATOR

SENSOR (REF

EVAP)

SENSOR (REF

CABINET)

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHT SWITCH

WIRING DIAGRAM

MODELS 611G-2 & 650G-2

WHITE W/BLUE STRIPE

WHITE W/RED STRIPE

RED

GRAY W/WHITE STRIPE

WHITE

YELLOW

PURPLE

TAN

PINK

BLUE

RED

RUNNING

CAPACITOR

PURPLE

WHITE

PURPLE

YELLOW

BLACK

GRAY

WHITE

RED

ORANGE

PURPLE

WHITE

GRAY

GREEN

1 PLAIN

2 RIBBED

GREEN

STARTING

RELAY

2 WHITE

1 ORANGE

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHTS

RED

WHITE

GREEN

RED

WHITE

GRAY

GREEN

-This wiring information is provided for use by qualified

service personnel only.

-Disconnect appliance from electrical supply before

beginning service.

-Be sure all grounding devices are connected when

service is complete.

-Failure to observe the above warnings may result in

severe electrical shock.

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

DOOR

HEATER

ORANGE W/YELLOW STRIPE

WHITE W/BLUE STRIPE

WHITE W/RED STRIPE

ORANGE

WHITE

PURPLE

2 WHITE

1 WHITE W/BLUE STRIPE

WHITE

RED

WHITE

RED

WHITE W/RED STRIPE

0E2 0

PIN 1

DISPLAY

PIN 1

PIN 1 E10

PIN 1

0J6

10-10

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Wiring Diagrams / Schematics

RED

160 Ohms

WHITE/RED

BLUE

GRAY/WHITE

20-22 Ohms

PINK

PURPLE

TAN

PURPLE

GRAY

BLACK

WHITE

RED

NEUT

WHITE

ORANGE

WHITE/BLUE

ORANGE W/BLACK

ORANGE

DOOR HEATER

2300-3000 Ohms

2700-3700 Ohms

ICEMAKER

SWITCH

YELLOW

FREEZER

LIGHT SWITCH

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHT SWITCH LIGHT

TERMINATOR

DEFROST

TERMINATOR

WHITE/RED

CONDENSER

FAN MOTOR

PINK

FREEZER

LIGHTS

PART NUMBER 3757920 REV A

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHTS

LIGHT

TERMINATOR

DEFROST

HEATER

ICEMAKER

WIRING SCHEMATIC

MODELS 611G-2 & 650G-2

FREEZER

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

E10E2 E7 E6

REFRIGERATOR

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

TAN

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

WATER

VALVE

FREEZER

FAN SWITCH

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

FREEZER

FAN MOTOR

RUNNING

CAPACITOR

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

REFRIGERATOR

FAN SWITCH

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

REFRIGERATOR

FAN MOTOR

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

-This wiring information is provided for use by qualified

service personnel only.

-Disconnect appliance from electrical supply before

beginning service.

-Be sure all grounding devices are connected when

service is complete.

-Failure to observe the above warnings may result in

severe electrical shock.

ACCENT

LIGHTS

FILL TUBE

HEATER

10-11 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Wiring Diagrams / Schematics Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

PIN 1

DISPLAY

PIN 1 0

PIN 1

E10

PART NUMBER 3756771

SENSOR

DEFROST

TERMINATOR

(FRE CABINET)

ICEMAKER

WATER VALVE

TAN

WHITE

DRAIN

HEATER

LOWER

FREEZER

LIGHT

ICEMAKER

DEFROST HEATER

4 WHITE

1 GREEN

2 TAN

3 PINK

ORANGE

FILL

TUBE

HEATER

WHITE

SENSOR

(REF

EVAP)

(FOUND BY COMPRESSOR)

BLACK

PURPLE

WHITE

ORANGE W/RED STRIPE

GRAY W/WHITE STRIPE

BLUE W/BLACK STRIPE

BLUE W/RED STRIPE

ORANGE W/RED STRIPE

BLUE W/RED STRIPE

SENSOR

(FRE EVAPORATOR)

GRAY

W/WHITE

STRIPE

BLACK 1

BLACK 2

FREEZER

FAN

MOTOR

BLUE W/BLACK STRIPE

1 RED

3 GREEN

2 WHITE

WHITE 2

ORANGE 3

BROWN 1

PINK

WHITE 2

GRAY 2

BLUE 1

GREEN

1 WHITE W/BLUE

2 WHITE

GRAY W/WHITE STRIPE

WHITE

BLUE WHITE

TAN

ORANGE

WHITE

TAN

1 RED

2 WHITE

3 GREEN

BROWN

ORANGE

WHITE

RUNNING

CAPACITOR

FREEZER

FAN SWITCH

LIGHT

TERMINATOR

FREEZER

LIGHT SWITCH

WHITE

UPPER

FREEZER

LIGHTS

ORANGE

TAN

PINK

BLUE

BROWN

WHITE

WHITE W/BLUE

RED

TAN

WHITE W/BLUE

PINK

BROWN

RED

WHITE

TAN

BLUE

GRAY W/WHITE

GRAY W/WHITE STRIPE

WHITE

TAN

YELLOW

PURPLE

BROWN

RED

PURPLE

TAN

YELLOW

GREEN

GRAY

WHITE

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

CONNECTOR

321

GREEN

1 PLAIN

2 RIBBED

GRAY

STARTING

RELAY

2 WHITE

WHITE W/BLUE STRIPE

WHITE W/RED

ORANGE W/YELLOW STRIPE

CONNECTOR

231 4

BLUE W/YELLOW STRIPE

BLUE W/WHITE STRIPE

BLACK

YELLOW

BLUE

PINK

GRAY

PURPLE

WHITE

TAN

1 ORANGE

ORANGE W/YELLOW STRIPE

BLUE W/YELLOW STRIPE

SENSOR

(REF CABINET)

ORANGE

WHITE

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHT SWITCH

1 PINK

2 WHITE

3 GREEN

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHTS

2 WHITE

1 BLACK

8 WHITE W/RED STRIPE

1 TAN

2 PURPLE

9 GRAY

6 WHITE W/BLUE STRIPE

3 PINK

7 BLUE

5 YELLOW

3 ORANGE

WHITE

GREEN

RED

WHITE

WHITE W/RED STRIPE 1

CONDENSER

FAN MOTOR

YELLOW

RED

GRAY

WHITE 2

WHITE

REFRIGERATOR

FAN SWITCH

LIGHT

TERMINATOR

REFRIGERATOR

FAN MOTOR

EMBRACO

COMPRESSOR

POWER

SUPLY

CORD

GREEN

BROWNBROWN

BLUE/YELLOW

ORANGE/YELLOW

BLUE/WHITE

WHITE/BLUE

GRAY/WHITE

BLUE/BLACK

ORANGE/RED

ICE MAKER VALVE SENSOR

LOW VOLTAGE THERMISTOR CIRCUITS

J1-8

J1-7

J1-6

J1-4

J1-3

J1-2

J1-1

J1-5

J4-5

J4-1

J4-4

J4-3

J4-2

FRZ COMPARTMENT

REF COMPARTMENT

DEF SENSOR

REF EVAP

REF COMPARTMENT

REF EVAP

FRZ EVAP

NOT USED(NO PIN)

REF DOOR LIGHT SENSE

FRZ DOOR LIGHT SENSE

FRZ EVAP

SENSES WATER VALVE ACTIVATION

SENSES WHEN DEF HEATER SHUTS OFF

SENSES REF CABINET

SENSES FRZ CABINET TEMP

SENSES REF CABINET

SENSES REF EVAP TEMP

SENSES IF REF DOOR OPEN

SENSES FRZ EVAP TEMP

SENSES IF FRZ DOOR OPEN

SENSES FRZ EVAP TEMP BLUE/RED

ORANGE

BROWN

TAN

CONTROL BOARD SUMMARY

ICE MAKER ACC (FILL TUBE)

C FAN

DEF HTR

RCOMP

FCOMP

E FAN

CIRCUIT

J7-3

J7-5

J7-4

J7-7

J7-6

J7-8

J7-2

J7-1

E10

ICE MAKER

NOT USED(NO PIN)

NOT USED

CONDENSER FAN

REF COMPRESSOR

POWER IN

FRZ COMPRESSOR

NEU

LITE

NEUTRAL

LIGHTS

DEFROST HEATER

DESCRIPTION

120 VOLT CIRCUITS

POWERS FILL TUBE HEATER AND ACCESSORIES

POWERS CONDENSER FAN

POWERS REF COMPRESSOR

POWERS LIGHTS

POWERS ICE MAKER

POWERS FRZ COMPRESSOR

POWER INTO BOARD

NEUTRAL INTO BOARD

POWERS DEFROST CIRCUIT

FUNCTION

YELLOW

WHITE

PINK

WHITE/RED

PURPLE

GRAY

BLACK

COLOR

BLUE

E2 E7 E10 E6

WIRING DIAGRAM

MODELS: 632-2 & 642-2

-This wiring information is provided for use by qualified

service personnel only.

-Disconnect appliance from electrical supply before

beginning service.

-Be sure all grounding devices are connected when

service is complete.

-Failure to observe the above warnings may result in

severe electrical shock.

10-12

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Wiring Diagrams / Schematics

NEUTL1

DRAIN

HEATER

DEFROST

HEATER

DEFROST

TERMINATOR

CONDENSER

FAN MOTOR

ICEMAKER

WATER

VALVE

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHTS

LIGHT

TERMINATOR

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHT SWITCH

FREEZER

LIGHTS

FREEZER

LIGHT

FREEZER

LIGHT SWITCH LIGHT

TERMINATOR

FILL TUBE

HEATER

FREEZER

FAN SWITCH

FREEZER

FAN MOTOR

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

FREEZER

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

RUNNING

CAPACITOR

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

REFRIGERATOR

FAN MOTOR

REFRIGERATOR

FAN SWITCH

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

REFRIGERATOR

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

PART NUMBER 3756771

RED

ORANGE

-This wiring information is provided for use by qualified

service personnel only.

-Disconnect appliance from electrical supply before

beginning service.

-Be sure all grounding devices are connected when

service is complete.

-Failure to observe the above warnings may result in

severe electrical shock.

160 OHMS

BLACK WHITE

GRAY

PURPLE

TAN

PINK

GRAY\WHITE

BLUE

WHITE\RED

ORANGE

BROWN

WHITE\BLUE

WHITE

RED

E7E2 E6E10

ORANGE

BROWN

21 OHMS

1890 OHMS

2600 OHMS

WIRING SCHEMATIC

MODELS: 632-2 & 642-2

10-13 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Wiring Diagrams / Schematics Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

PIN 1

DISPLAY

PIN 1

E10

E7 J5

PART NUMBER 3758436 REV A

SENSOR

DEF.

TERM.

(FRE CABINET)

ICEMAKER

WATER VALVE

TAN

WHITE

DRAIN

HEATER

LOWER

FREEZER

LIGHT

ICEMAKER

DEFROST HEATER

4 WHITE

1 GREEN

2 TAN

3 PINK

ORANGE

FILL

TUBE

HEATER

WHITE

SENSOR

(REF

EVAP)

(FOUND BY COMPRESSOR)

BLACK

PURPLE

WHITE

ORANGE W/RED STRIPE

GRAY W/WHITE STRIPE

BLUE W/BLACK STRIPE

BLUE W/RED STRIPE

ORANGE W/RED STRIPE

BLUE W/RED STRIPE

SENSOR

(FRE EVAPORATOR)

BROWN

BLACK

FREEZER

FAN

MOTOR

BLUE W/BLACK STRIPE

1 RED

3 GREEN

2 WHITE

WHITE 2

ORANGE 3

BROWN 1

PINK

WHITE

GRAY

BLUE

GREEN/YELLOW

WHITE W/BLUE

WHITE

TAN

ORANGE

WHITE

TAN

1 RED

2 WHITE

3 GREEN/YELLOW

BROWN

ORANGE

WHITE

FREEZER

FAN SWITCH

LIGHT

TERM.

FREEZER

LIGHT SWITCH

WHITE

UPPER

FREEZER

LIGHTS

ORANGE

PINK

BLUE

BROWN

WHITE

WHITE/BLUE

TAN

WHITE/BLUE

PINK

ORANGE/BLACK

RED

WHITE

TAN

BLUE

GRAY/WHITE

WHITE

TAN

YELLOW

PURPLE

ORANGE W/BLK

RED

PURPLE

TAN

YELLOW

GREEN/YELLOW

GRAY

WHITE

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

CONNECTOR

321

GREEN

1 PLAIN

2 RIBBED

GRAY

STARTING

RELAY

2 WHITE

ORANGE W/YELLOW STRIPE

CONNECTOR

231 4

BLUE W/YELLOW STRIPE

BLUE W/WHITE STRIPE

1 ORANGE

ORANGE W/YELLOW STRIPE

BLUE W/YELLOW STRIPE

SENSOR

(REF CABINET)

ORANGE

WHITE

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHT SWITCH

1 PINK

2 WHITE

3 GREEN

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHTS

WHITE

BLACK

WHITE W/RED STRIPE

TAN

PURPLE

GRAY

WHITE W/BLUE STRIPE

PINK

BLUE

YELLOW

ORANGE

WHITE

GREEN/YELLOW

RED

WHITE

WHITE W/RED STRIPE 1

CONDENSER

FAN MOTOR

YELLOW

RED

GRAY

WHITE 2

WHITE

REFRIGERATOR

FAN SWITCH

LIGHT

TERMINATOR

REFRIGERATOR

FAN MOTOR

EMBRACO

COMPRESSOR

POWER

SUPLY

CORD

GREEN/YELLOW

GREEN

ORANGE W/BLACK

WHITE

GRAY/WHITE

BLUE

WHITE

WHITE/BLUE

GRAY/WHITE

358176924

635421

-This wiring information is provided for use by qualified

service personnel only.

-Disconnect appliance from electrical supply before

beginning service.

-Be sure all grounding devices are connected when

service is complete.

-Failure to observe the above warnings may result in

severe electrical shock.

BLUE/YELLOW

ORANGE/YELLOW

BLUE/WHITE

WHITE/BLUE

GRAY/WHITE

BLUE/BLACK

ORANGE/RED

ICE MAKER VALVE SENSOR

LOW VOLTAGE THERMISTOR CIRCUITS

J1-8

J1-7

J1-6

J1-4

J1-3

J1-2

J1-1

J1-5

J4-5

J4-1

J4-4

J4-3

J4-2

FRZ COMPARTMENT

REF COMPARTMENT

DEF SENSOR

REF EVAP

REF COMPARTMENT

REF EVAP

FRZ EVAP

NOT USED(NO PIN)

REF DOOR LIGHT SENSE

FRZ DOOR LIGHT SENSE

FRZ EVAP

SENSES WATER VALVE ACTIVATION

SENSES WHEN DEF HEATER SHUTS OFF

SENSES REF CABINET

SENSES FRZ CABINET TEMP

SENSES REF CABINET

SENSES REF EVAP TEMP

SENSES IF REF DOOR OPEN

SENSES FRZ EVAP TEMP

SENSES IF FRZ DOOR OPEN

SENSES FRZ EVAP TEMP BLUE/RED

ORANGE

ORANG/BLACK

TAN

CONTROL BOARD SUMMARY

ICE MAKER ACC (FILL TUBE)

C FAN

DEF HTR

RCOMP

FCOMP

E FAN

CIRCUIT

J7-3

J7-5

J7-4

J7-7

J7-6

J7-8

J7-2

J7-1

E10

ICE MAKER

NOT USED(NO PIN)

NOT USED

REF FAN SWITCH

CONDENSER FAN

REF COMPRESSOR

POWER IN

FRZ COMPRESSOR

NEU

LITE

NEUTRAL

LIGHTS

DEFROST HEATER

DESCRIPTION

120 VOLT CIRCUITS

POWERS FILL TUBE HEATER AND ACCESSORIES

POWERS CONDENSER FAN

POWERS REF COMPRESSOR

POWERS LIGHTS

POWERS ICE MAKER

POWERS FRZ COMPRESSOR

POWER INTO BOARD

NEUTRAL INTO BOARD

POWERS DEFROST CIRCUIT

FUNCTION

YELLOW

WHITE

PINK

WHITE/RED

PURPLE

GRAY

BLACK

COLOR

BLUE

E2 E7 E10 E6

POWERS REF FAN SWITCH GRAY

WIRING DIAGRAM

MODEL: 661-2

10-14

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Wiring Diagrams / Schematics

NEUTL1

DRAIN

HEATER

DEFROST

HEATER

DEFROST

TERMINATOR

CONDENSER

FAN MOTOR

ICEMAKER

WATER

VALVE

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHTS

LIGHT

TERMINATOR

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHT SWITCH

FREEZER

LIGHTS

FREEZER

LIGHT

FREEZER

LIGHT SWITCH LIGHT

TERMINATOR

FILL TUBE

HEATER

FREEZER

FAN SWITCH

FREEZER

FAN MOTOR

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

FREEZER

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

STARTING

RELAY

RUNNING

CAPACITOR

REFRIGERATOR COMPRESSOR

STARTING RELAY

REFRIGERATOR

FAN MOTOR

REFRIGERATOR

FAN SWITCH

115 VOLTS

60 CYCLES

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

REFRIGERATOR

OVERLOAD

PROTECTOR

PART NUMBER 3758436 REV A

RED

ORANGE

OPENS ON T-RISE

RUNNING

CAPACITOR

-This wiring information is provided for use by qualified

service personnel only.

-Disconnect appliance from electrical supply before

beginning service.

-Be sure all grounding devices are connected when

service is complete.

-Failure to observe the above warnings may result in

severe electrical shock.

21 OHMS

1890 OHMS

2600 OHMS

160 OHMS

BLACK WHITE

GRAY

PURPLE

TAN

PINK

GRAY\WHITE

BLUE

WHITE\RED

ORANGE

WHITE\BLUE

WHITE

RED

E7E2 E6E10

ORANGE

ORANGE/BLACK

YELLOW

GRAY

WIRING SCHEMATIC

MODEL: 661-2

10-15 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Wiring Diagrams / Schematics Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

WHITE W/BLUE STRIPE

WHITE W/RED STRIPE

ICE DISPENSER

DOOR

SOLENOID

ICE DOOR

CONTROL PANEL

GROUND

SOLENOID

ICEMAKER

AUGER MOTOR

WATER

SOLENOID

LWR FREEZER LT

RED

WHITE

RED WHITE

TAN

TERM

GRAY/WHITE

MOTOR

FAN

FREEZER

4 PINK

5 PINK

2 WHITE

1 BLUE

2 GRAY

FILL TUBE HEATER

DEFROST

TERMINATOR

1 WHITE W/BLUE

WHITE

2 WHITE

FRE FAN MOTOR TERM

1 BLACK

2 BLACK

DEFROST

HEATER

ICEMAKER

1 RED

2 RED

UPPER

FREEZER

LIGHT

(FRE CABINET)

COMPRESSOR)

4 WHITE

3 WHITE

2 ORANGE

1 ORANGE

BLUE W/RED STRIPE

CONTROL LIGHTS

BROWN

(FRE EVAP)

SENSOR

REDUNDANT

MULLION

CHUTE

HEATER

BLACK

WHITE

HEATER

ORANGE

WHITE

BLUE

RED

WHITE

WHITE W/BLUE STRIPE

WHITE

BLUE W/BLACK STRIPE

ORANGE W/RED STRIPE

BLUE W/RED STRIPE

LIGHT

DISPLAY

ORANGE

WHITE

(FOUND BY

CONNECTOR

WHITE

GRAY W/WHITE STRIPE

BLUE W/BLACK STRIPE

YELLOW

ORANGE W/BLACK

BLUE

PURPLE

GRAY

PINK

BLACK

TAN

WHITE W/BLUE STRIPE

ORANGE

BROWN

WHITE

REFRIG

5 WHITE

GLASS

WELL

HEATER

GLASS

WELL

LIGHT

CONTROL

RED

BLUE

GREEN GREEN

PINK

TERMINATOR

SENSOR

(REF CABINET)

2 BROWN

1 YELLOW

3 RED

ORANGE

BLUE W/WHITE

ORANGE W/YELLOW

BLUE W/YELLOW

1 ORANGE

2 WHITE

3 GREEN

2 WHITE

1 PINKRED

WHITE

GREEN

WHITE

LIGHT

(REF EVAP)

SENSOR

FAN

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHTS

REFRIG

LIGHT SWITCH

CONNECTOR

GREEN

ORANGE/BLK

FREEZER

FAN SWITCH

POWER SUPPLY CORD

LT SWITCH

FREEZER

ORANGE

3YELLOW

2WHITE

1 ORANGE

WHITE

YELLOW

2 RIBBED

1 PLAIN

GREEN

PURPLE

WHITE

BLACK

WHITE

PURPLE

RED

PURPLE

YELLOW

GRAY/WHITE STRIPE

WHITE/BLUE STRIPE

ORANGE/BLACK

TAN

PINK

BLUE

GRAY

WHITE

YELLOW

WHITE W/BLUE STRIPE

WHITE W/RED STRIPE

BROWN

RED

WHITE

GRAY

BLACK

WHITE

GREEN

ORANGE

PINK

5 WHITE

3 RED

2 BROWN

4 GREEN

1 YELLOW

RED

GRAY

WHITE

REFRIG

FAN SWITCH

GRAY

CONDENSER

FAN MOTOR

GREEN

MOTOR

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHTS

WHITE

RED 1

WHITE 2

GREEN 3

1 BROWN

RED

GREEN

WHITE

2 RED

4 WHITE

WHITE

RED

BROWN

ORANGE/BLACK

GRAY/WHT

BLUE

3 PINK

2 TAN

1 GREEN

BLUE

PINK

TAN

WHITE/BLUE STRIPE

GRAY/WHITE STRIPE

YELLOW

GRAY

SERVICE

ONLY

( )

PART NUMBER 3758468 REV. A

PIN 1

E10

PIN 1

J1 J4

3214

MEMBRANE SWITCH

CAPACITOR

STARTING

FREEZER COMPRESSOR

RUNNING

TAN

RELAY

WHITE

COMPRESSOR

FREEZER

REFRIGERATOR COMPRESSOR

TAN

WHITE

-This wiring information is provided for use by qualified

service personnel only.

-Disconnect appliance from electrical supply before

beginning service.

-Be sure all grounding devices are connected when

service is complete.

-Failure to observe the above warnings may result in

severe electrical shock.

FUNCTION

POWERS LIGHTS

CONTROL BOARD SUMMARY/ LAYOUT

SENSES IF FREEZER DOOR OPEN

POWERS FREEZER COMPRESSOR

POWERS REFRIG. COMPRESSOR

NEUTRAL INTO BOARD

POWER INTO BOARD

POWERS DEFROST CIRCUIT

SENSES WATER VALVE ACTIVATION

POWERS FILL TUBE AND ACCESSORIES

SENSES WHEN HEATER SHUTS OFF

POWERS CONDENSER FAN

SENSES IF REF DOOR OPEN

DESCRIPTION

120 VOLT CIRCUITS

NEUTRAL

POWER IN

REFRIG FAN SWITCH

LIGHTS

FREEZER LIGHT SENSOR

FREEZER COMPRESSOR

REFRIGERATOR COMPRESSOR

DEFROST HEATER

CONDENSER

DEFROST SENSE-TERMINATOR

NOT USED (NO PIN)

REF LIGHT SENSOR

ICE MAKER VALVE

ICE MAKER ACCESSORIES (FILL TUBE)

J7-2

CIRCUIT

J4-1

E10

J4-2

J4-3

J7-1

J4-4

J5-5

J7-3

J7-4

COLOR

ORANGE/BLK

WHITE

BLACK

PURPLE

ORANGE

WHT/RED

WHT/BLUE

YELLOW

GRAY/WHT

BLUE

GRAY

TAN

REFRIGERATOR COMPARTMENT

J1-6

120 VOLT CIRCUITS CONTINUED

NOT USED

ICE MAKER

BULK ICE

THERMISTOR CIRCUITS

REFRIGERATOR EVAPORATOR

FREEZER EVAPORATOR

REFRIGERATOR COMPARTMENT

REFRIGERATOR EVAPORATOR

CIRCUIT

J7-7

J7-5

J7-6

J1-3

J1-1

J1-2

J1-5

J1-4

DESCRIPTION

FREEZER COMPARTMENT

J1-7

J1-8

ORANGE/RED

BLUE/YELLOW

BLUE/BLACK

ORANGE/YELLOW

BLUE/WHITE

SENSES REF COMPARTMENT TEMP

POWERS ICE MAKER

SENSES REF EVAP TEMP

SENSES FRE EVAP TEMP

SENSES REF EVAP TEMP

POWERS AUGER MOTOR

SENSES FRE EVAP TEMP

SENSES REF COMPARTMENT TEMP

FUNCTION COLOR

PINK

BROWN

BLUE/RED

BLUE/WHITE

SENSES FREZ COMPARTMENT TEMP

E10

POWERS REF FAN SW GRAY

13 4

MODELS:

WIRING DIAGRAM

685-2 (Prior to Serial #2271174)

695-2 (Prior to Serial #2269189)

10-16

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Wiring Diagrams / Schematics

PART NUMBER 3758468 REV A

SECONDARY GLASS WELL

CAPACITOR

STARTING RELAY

CAPACITOR

WATER DISPENSER

PROTECTOR

OVERLOAD

FREEZER FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

STARTING RELAY

COMPRESSOR

FREEZER

RUNNING

LIGHT SWITCH TERMINATOR

FREEZER

FAN SWITCH

FREEZER

LIGHT

TERMINATOR

DEFROST

2300-2900

TERMINATOR

FREEZER FAN

7200

LIGHTS

FREEZER

FILL TUBE

FAN MOTOR

HEATER

FREEZER

HEATER

REFRIGERATOR

FAN MOTOR

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

FAN MOTOR

CONDENSER

29 OHMS

REFRIGERATOR

FAN SWITCH

COMPRESSOR

HEATER

DEFROST

REFRIGERATOR

RUNNING

SWITCH

MEMBRANE

LOW VOLTAGE

SWITCH

ICE

SWITCH

CIRCUIT

19.V.D.C.

GLASS WELL

LIGHT SWITCH

SWITCH

WATER

CONTROL

DISPENSE

ICE

SWITCH

ICE MAKER

100 OHMS

GLASS WELL HEATER

14400 OHMS

LOCK GLASSWELL

BUTTON

SOLENOID

ICE DOOR

ICEMAKER

AUGER

SWITCH

880 OHMS MULLION CHUTE

VALVE

160 OHMS

HEATER

AUGER

MOTOR

SOLENOID

ICEMAKER

160 OHMS

60 CYCLES

115 VOLTS

LIGHT SWITCH

REFRIGERATOR TERMINATOR

LIGHT

REFRIGERATOR

CONTROL LIGHTS

LIGHTS

NEUT

ON T-RISE

OPENS

( )

ON T-RISE

OPENS

( )

ON T-RISE

OPENS

(OPENS ON T-RISE)

-This wiring information is provided for use by qualified

service personnel only.

-Disconnect appliance from electrical supply before

beginning service.

-Be sure all grounding devices are connected when

service is complete.

-Failure to observe the above warnings may result in

severe electrical shock.

BROWN

YELLOW

WHITE/RED

PINK

YELLOW

WHITE\BLUE

PURPLE

GRAY

GREY\WHITE

ORANGE W/BLACK

GREY

PURPLE

BLUE

WHITE\BLUE

WHITE\RED

GREY\WHITE

YELLOW

TAN

ORANGE/BLK

WHITE\BLUE

ORANGE/BLK

YELLOW

TAN

WHITE\BLUE

BROWN

PINK

WHITE

BLACK

ORANGE

WHITE

GREY GREY

MODELS:

WIRING SCHEMATIC

685-2 (Prior to Serial #2271174)

695-2 (Prior to Serial #2269189)

10-17 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Wiring Diagrams / Schematics Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

WHITE W/BLUE STRIPE

WHITE W/RED STRIPE

ICE DISPENSER

DOOR

SOLENOID

ICE DOOR

CONTROL PANEL

GROUND

SOLENOID

ICEMAKER

AUGER MOTOR

WATER

SOLENOID

LWR FREEZER LT

RED

WHITE

RED WHITE

TAN

TERM

GRAY/WHITE

MOTOR

FAN

FREEZER

4 PINK

5 PINK

2 WHITE

1 BLUE

2 GRAY

FILL TUBE HEATER

DEFROST

TERMINATOR

1 WHITE W/BLUE

WHITE

2 WHITE

FRE FAN MOTOR TERM

1 BLACK

2 BLACK

DEFROST

HEATER

ICEMAKER

1 RED

2 RED

UPPER

FREEZER

LIGHT

(FRE CABINET)

COMPRESSOR)

4 WHITE

3 WHITE

2 ORANGE

1 ORANGE

BLUE W/RED STRIPE

CONTROL LIGHTS

BROWN

(FRE EVAP)

SENSOR

REDUNDANT

MULLION

CHUTE

HEATER

BLACK

WHITE

HEATER

ORANGE

WHITE

BLUE

RED

WHITE

WHITE W/BLUE STRIPE

WHITE

BLUE W/BLACK STRIPE

ORANGE W/RED STRIPE

BLUE W/RED STRIPE

LIGHT

DISPLAY

ORANGE

WHITE

(FOUND BY

CONNECTOR

WHITE

GRAY W/WHITE STRIPE

BLUE W/BLACK STRIPE

YELLOW

ORANGE W/BLACK

BLUE

PURPLE

GRAY

PINK

BLACK

TAN

WHITE W/BLUE STRIPE

ORANGE

BROWN

WHITE

REFRIG

5 WHITE

GLASS

WELL

HEATER

GLASS

WELL

LIGHT

CONTROL

RED

BLUE

GREEN GREEN

PINK

TERMINATOR

SENSOR

(REF CABINET)

2 BROWN

1 YELLOW

3 RED

ORANGE

BLUE W/WHITE

ORANGE W/YELLOW

BLUE W/YELLOW

1 ORANGE

2 WHITE

3 GREEN

2 WHITE

1 PINKRED

WHITE

GREEN

WHITE

LIGHT

(REF EVAP)

SENSOR

FAN

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHTS

REFRIG

LIGHT SWITCH

CONNECTOR

GREEN

ORANGE/BLK

FREEZER

FAN SWITCH

CORD

POWER

SUPPLY

LT SWITCH

FREEZER

ORANGE

3YELLOW

2WHITE

1 ORANGE

WHITE

YELLOW

2 RIBBED

1 PLAIN

GREEN

FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

PURPLE

WHITE

BLACK

WHITE

PURPLE

FREEZER COMPRESSOR

RED

PURPLE

YELLOW

GRAY/WHITE STRIPE

WHITE/BLUE STRIPE

ORANGE/BLACK

TAN

PINK

BLUE

GRAY

WHITE

YELLOW

WHITE W/BLUE STRIPE

WHITE W/RED STRIPE

BROWN

RED

WHITE

GRAY

BLACK

WHITE

GREEN

ORANGE

PINK

5 WHITE

3 RED

2 BROWN

4 GREEN

1 YELLOW

RED

GRAY

WHITE

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

REFRIG

FAN SWITCH

GRAY

CONDENSER

FAN MOTOR

GREEN

MOTOR

REFRIGERATOR

LIGHTS

WHITE

RED 1

WHITE 2

GREEN 3

1 BROWN

RED

GREEN

WHITE

2 RED

4 WHITE

WHITE

RED

BROWN

ORANGE/BLACK

GRAY/WHT

BLUE

3 PINK

2 TAN

1 GREEN

BLUE

PINK

TAN

WHITE/BLUE STRIPE

GRAY/WHITE STRIPE

YELLOW

GRAY

SERVICE

ONLY

( )

PART NUMBER 3757969 REV. D

PIN 1

E10

PIN 1

J1 J4

3214

MEMBRANE SWITCH

-This wiring information is provided for use by qualified

service personnel only.

-Disconnect appliance from electrical supply before

beginning service.

-Be sure all grounding devices are connected when

service is complete.

-Failure to observe the above warnings may result in

severe electrical shock.

FUNCTION

POWERS LIGHTS

CONTROL BOARD SUMMARY/ LAYOUT

SENSES IF FREEZER DOOR OPEN

POWERS FREEZER COMPRESSOR

POWERS REFRIG. COMPRESSOR

NEUTRAL INTO BOARD

POWER INTO BOARD

POWERS DEFROST CIRCUIT

SENSES WATER VALVE ACTIVATION

POWERS FILL TUBE AND ACCESSORIES

SENSES WHEN HEATER SHUTS OFF

POWERS CONDENSER FAN

SENSES IF REF DOOR OPEN

DESCRIPTION

120 VOLT CIRCUITS

NEUTRAL

POWER IN

REFRIG FAN SWITCH

LIGHTS

FREEZER LIGHT SENSOR

FREEZER COMPRESSOR

REFRIGERATOR COMPRESSOR

DEFROST HEATER

CONDENSER

DEFROST SENSE-TERMINATOR

NOT USED (NO PIN)

REF LIGHT SENSOR

ICE MAKER VALVE

ICE MAKER ACCESSORIES (FILL TUBE)

J7-2

CIRCUIT

J4-1

E10

J4-2

J4-3

J7-1

J4-4

J5-5

J7-3

J7-4

COLOR

ORANGE/BLK

WHITE

BLACK

PURPLE

ORANGE

WHT/RED

WHT/BLUE

YELLOW

GRAY/WHT

BLUE

GRAY

TAN

REFRIGERATOR COMPARTMENT

J1-6

120 VOLT CIRCUITS CONTINUED

NOT USED

ICE MAKER

BULK ICE

THERMISTOR CIRCUITS

REFRIGERATOR EVAPORATOR

FREEZER EVAPORATOR

REFRIGERATOR COMPARTMENT

REFRIGERATOR EVAPORATOR

CIRCUIT

J7-7

J7-5

J7-6

J1-3

J1-1

J1-2

J1-5

J1-4

DESCRIPTION

FREEZER COMPARTMENT

J1-7

J1-8

ORANGE/RED

BLUE/YELLOW

BLUE/BLACK

ORANGE/YELLOW

BLUE/WHITE

SENSES REF COMPARTMENT TEMP

POWERS ICE MAKER

SENSES REF EVAP TEMP

SENSES FRE EVAP TEMP

SENSES REF EVAP TEMP

POWERS AUGER MOTOR

SENSES FRE EVAP TEMP

SENSES REF COMPARTMENT TEMP

FUNCTION COLOR

PINK

BROWN

BLUE/RED

BLUE/WHITE

SENSES FREZ COMPARTMENT TEMP

E1E1

E10

POWERS REF FAN SW GRAY

13 4

MODELS:

WIRING DIAGRAM

685-2 (Starting w/Serial #2271174)

695-2 (Starting w/Serial #2269189)

10-18

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series Wiring Diagrams / Schematics

PART NUMBER 3757969 REV D

SECONDARY GLASS WELL

CAPACITOR

STARTING RELAY

CAPACITOR

WATER DISPENSER

PROTECTOR

OVERLOAD

FREEZER FREEZER

COMPRESSOR

STARTING RELAY

COMPRESSOR

FREEZER

RUNNING

LIGHT SWITCH TERMINATOR

FREEZER

FAN SWITCH

FREEZER

LIGHT

TERMINATOR

DEFROST

2300-2900

TERMINATOR

FREEZER FAN

7200

LIGHTS

FREEZER

FILL TUBE

FAN MOTOR

HEATER

FREEZER

HEATER

REFRIGERATOR

FAN MOTOR

REFRIGERATOR

COMPRESSOR

FAN MOTOR

CONDENSER

29 OHMS

REFRIGERATOR

FAN SWITCH

COMPRESSOR

HEATER

DEFROST

REFRIGERATOR

RUNNING

SWITCH

MEMBRANE

LOW VOLTAGE

SWITCH

ICE

SWITCH

CIRCUIT

19.V.D.C.

GLASS WELL

LIGHT SWITCH

SWITCH

WATER

CONTROL

DISPENSE

ICE

SWITCH

ICE MAKER

100 OHMS

GLASS WELL HEATER

14400 OHMS

LOCK GLASSWELL

BUTTON

SOLENOID

ICE DOOR

ICEMAKER

AUGER

SWITCH

880 OHMS MULLION CHUTE

VALVE

160 OHMS

HEATER

AUGER

MOTOR

SOLENOID

ICEMAKER

160 OHMS

60 CYCLES

115 VOLTS

LIGHT SWITCH

REFRIGERATOR TERMINATOR

LIGHT

REFRIGERATOR

CONTROL LIGHTS

LIGHTS

NEUT

ON T-RISE

OPENS

( )

ON T-RISE

OPENS

( )

ON T-RISE

OPENS

(OPENS ON T-RISE)

-This wiring information is provided for use by qualified

service personnel only.

-Disconnect appliance from electrical supply before

beginning service.

-Be sure all grounding devices are connected when

service is complete.

-Failure to observe the above warnings may result in

severe electrical shock.

BROWN

YELLOW

WHITE/RED

PINK

YELLOW

WHITE\BLUE

PURPLE

GRAY

GREY\WHITE

ORANGE W/BLACK

GREY

PURPLE

BLUE

WHITE\BLUE

WHITE\RED

GREY\WHITE

YELLOW

TAN

ORANGE/BLK

WHITE\BLUE

ORANGE/BLK

YELLOW

TAN

WHITE\BLUE

BROWN

PINK

WHITE

BLACK

ORANGE

WHITE

GREY GREY

MODELS:

WIRING SCHEMATIC

685-2 (Starting w/Serial #2271174)

695-2 (Starting w/Serial #2269189)

10-19 #3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

Wiring Diagrams / Schematics Built-In

Built-In (600-

(600-2

)Series

Series

10-20

#3758407 - Revision B - August, 2006

3758407_RevB_600 2_S 10_WireDgrms_BlkforKB_28Aug06.qxp 650G 600 2 Sub Zero Built In Series Refrigerator Service Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation